Home

STP 11-25L13-SM-TG Soldier`s Manual and Trainer`s

1. 2 Performed routine checks 3 Performed operator maintenance 4 Completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 12 August 2008 3 81 STP 11 25L13 SM TG OPERATE TELEPHONE MAINTENANCE TRUCK 113 588 2007 Conditions Given an operator and a utility telephone maintenance truck Standards Leveled the telephone maintenance truck operated derrick and moved boom to work position Performance Steps 1 Position truck on solid level ground as close as possible to the work area 2 Engage parking brake and chock the wheels 3 Engage power take off PTO 4 Lower the outriggers 5 Operate derrick and move boom to work position Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Positioned truck on solid level ground as close as possible to the work area 2 Engaged parking brake and chocked the wheels 3 Engaged PTO 4 Lowered the outriggers 5 Operated derrick and moved boom to work position Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails
2. 1 Inspected ULM in accordance with TM maintenance chart 2 Inspected completed DA Form 2404 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 12 August 2008 3 165 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 16 LAN WAN SUBSTATION INSPECTION VERIFY ENGINEERING INSTALLATION PACKAGE EIP 113 613 4003 Conditions Given necessary material and EIP in the current operating environment Standards Verify correct interpretation of an EIP while balancing operational risks with user quality of service Performance Steps 1 Inspect the EIP a Verify the EIP numbering for accuracy b Verify the cover page includes the correct project title organizational data date and distribution statement 2 Review the installation steps and instructions a Review sequence of installation steps and special instructions b Review BOM c Review the PCM d Review drawings 1 Verify any specific equipment requirements 2 Verify standard drawing numbering system 3 Verify site specific drawings e Review drawings changes if needed 1 Verify minor changes and any required testing 2 Verify any major changes that alter equi
3. 3 Checked telephone set TA 838 TT 4 Checked completeness 12 August 2008 3 79 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO GO 5 Checked handset retaining spring 6 Completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 650 12 3 80 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 5 TELEPHONE MAINTENANCE TRUCK PERFORM PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES PMCS ON TELEPHONE MAINTENANCE TRUCK 113 588 0007 Conditions Given utility telephone maintenance truck on vehicle equipment tools DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 and the appropriate maintenance allocation chart MAC Standards Performed maintenance completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the maintenance vehicle was operational or evacuated to higher echelon maintenance Performance Steps 1 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Perform routine checks 3 Perform operator maintenance Refer to the appropriate MAC 4 Complete DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Initiated DA Form 2404
4. Performed Grounded Strap and ROD Removal Procedures Secured the Shelter Door and All External covers SAMPLE EVALUATOR S NAME UNIT SFC Whitman A CO 369th SOLDIER S NAME STATUS SPC Anderson co X noco DA FORM 5164 R SEP 1985 EDITION OF DEC 82 IS OBSOLETE APD PE v2 01 Figure A 1 Sample of a completed DA Form 5164 R A 2 12 August 2008 APPENDIX B DA Form 5165 R Field Expedient Squad Book B 1 Introduction This appendix provides a sample of DA Form 5165 R see Figure B 1 for the tasks in this STP DA Form 5165 R allows the trainer to keep a record of task proficiency for a group of Soldiers Trainers should use the following instructions for using this form B 2 Prior to Evaluating the Soldier a Obtain a blank copy of DA Form 5165 R which you may locally reproduce on 8 1 2 by 11 inch paper The form also can be downloaded from the U S Army Publishing Directorate at http www army mil usapa index html b Enter the SM task number and abbreviated task title for the evaluated tasks in the appropriate column Use additional sheets as necessary c Locally reproduce the partially completed form if you are evaluating more than nine Soldiers B 3 During the Evaluation a Enter the names of the Soldiers you are evaluating one name per column at the top of the form You may add the names of newly assigned Soldiers
5. Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier he must complete an outgoing call Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Mounted the DNVT 2 Made bit rate select change 3 Connected telephone cable 4 Turned on proper channel card on the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC 5 Established communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 12 August 2008 3 73 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References 3 74 Required TB 11 5805 780 15 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 TM 11 5805 735 12 Related 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL TELEPHONE SET TA 838 TT 113 600 1017 Conditions Given telephone set TA 838 TT telephone cable WF 16 U or WD 1 TT battery BA 42 Type C four each or battery BA 3042 U four each tool equipment TE 33 screwdriver and TM 11 5805 650 1 2 Standards Installed the telephone set and established communications Performance Steps Refer to TM 11 5805 650 12 for performance steps 1 through 5 1 Install batteries 2 Perform pre installation checks a Select mode switch position b Check side tone 3 Mount telephone set on desk or vertical mount 4 Determine if switchboard connections are 4 wire or 2 wire 5 Connect WF 16 U to tele
6. 2 Measure along the line an equal distance on either side of point 1 and mark these points as A and A1 3 Use a fabricated compass to swing arcs from points A and A1 at 90 degrees to the reference or baseline above and below point 1 Mark the points where the arcs intersect as B and B1 4 Snap a chalk line though marks B B1 and point 1 If these three points are not directly in line recheck all measurements and make necessary corrections 6 Draft extended lines beyond obstructions a Bisecting Arcs This method can be used to make a baseline parallel to the reference line and to extend lines beyond an obstruction 1 Mark three points equal in length as A B and C on the reference line Lengths A B and B C must be of equal distance 2 Using a fabricated compass long enough to clear the obstruction swing intersecting arcs from points A and B and then swing intersecting arcs from B and C 3 Snap a chalk line through these two points points where A and B intersected and where B and C intersected Make sure the chalk line is long enough to go past the obstruction 4 Repeat these steps going from the projected line back to the original line opposite direction to continue the original line on the other side of the obstruction Use the exact same measurements and compass length The new points are indicated as A1 B1 and C1 5 Snap a chalk line through the second set of points to extend the original reference line past the o
7. References Required Related FM 3 25 26 TC 24 20 12 August 2008 3 155 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT EXISTING CABLE LINES 113 588 6001 Conditions Given vehicle with driver notebook pencil and DA Form 2407 Standards Inspected and noted any defects noticed on the drive through and if required prepared and submitted DA Form 2407 to repair crew or a higher maintenance level for correction Performance Steps 1 Check for broken sections in the cable Check for disconnected cable or pulse restorers Check aerial and buried road crossings Check for proper sag at aerial road crossings Check for missing or defective cutting rings Check for creeping cable Check insulated joints and cable bonds Check for tree growth along cable route Check cable terminals and terminal boxes O o OA N O a A OO N Check cables for bowing _ Check for dancing cable 12 Check suspension strand Performance Measures 1 Checked for broken sections in the cable Checked for disconnected cable or pulse restorers Checked aerial and buried road crossings Checked for proper sag at aerial road crossings Checked for missing or defective cutting rings Checked for creeping cable Checked insulated joints and cable bonds Checked for tree growth along cable route Checked cable terminals and terminal boxes O Oo OA N O oO A W N Checked cables for bowing _
8. 008 3 77 113 600 3020 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Telephone Set TA 838 TT 0 3 79 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 5 TELEPHONE MAINTENANCE TRUCK 113 588 0007 Perform Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS on Telephone Maintenance Truck c ccccceceeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeecaeaeeeeeeesesennennanenees 3 81 113 588 2007 Operate Telephone Maintenance Truck 2 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeecneeaeeeeeeeeeteees 3 82 Subject Area 6 LAN WAN SUBSTATION 113 583 1001 Perform Soldering TeChniques cccccceeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeecieeeeeeteeeeeecaeeeseetneeeneeaas 3 83 113 583 1002 Install Cable Rack and Wire Wal ccecescceeeeereeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseetaeeeeeeneeeeeneaas 3 86 113 583 1003 Install Distribution Frames 0 cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneaeeeseeeeeeteeaeeeeeeaees 3 91 113 583 1004 Install Anchoring Devices 0 0 0 cece eeeeee eee eeee eter eeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeseneaeeeseeeaeeesenaeeeseenaees 3 94 113 583 1007 Interpret Engineering Installation Packet EIP 0 cceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeenneeeeeeaes 3 97 113 583 1008 Perform Marking Site Layout ecceeeeeeeteeeeeenneeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 3 100 113 583 1009 Install Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN Substation Distribution Syster a E TE E AON AAAA 3 104 113 583 2001 Operate Hand and Power ToolS sessesseneneesseeesrrrnttesrerrrnrennsserrttnnnn
9. 22 August 2005 Operational Terms and Graphics 21 September 2004 Standard Installation Practices Outside Plant Cable Splicing 15 July 1980 Standard Installation Practices Telephone Outside Plant Installation Drop and Block Wiring and Station Installation 30 April 1975 Standard Installation Practices Delta Matched Doublet Antenna 31 January 1975 Antenna Systems HF Rhombic Antenna 30 May 1977 Installation Practices Erection of Steel Towers 15 March 1969 Signal Support in the Air Land Battle 15 October 1990 Map Reading and Land Navigation 18 January 2005 Training the Force 22 October 2002 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings Antenna Products Company Manual Safety Climbing Equipment Networking A Beginner s Guide by Bruce A Hallberg 22 December 1999 References 1 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Manufacturers Manuals MIL HDBK 419A MIL STD 188 124B 3 The National Electric Code NEC SPD UNIT OPORD USAF TO 31 10 3 Technical Bulletins TB 11 5805 780 15 TB 385 4 Technical Manuals TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 3895 203 15 TM 11 3895 209 14 TM 11 5805 201 12 TM 11 5805 650 12 TM 11 5805 702 12 TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 TM 11 5805 735 12 References 2 Manufacturer s manuals i
10. 3 Select site within 100 meters of 8 digit grid coordinate given in team packet OPORD that provides Note Considerations are listed in order of importance Site security Site accessibility Concealment from air and ground Antenna location Assemblage location oaao 4 Draw site plan showing Position of all assemblages Antenna location Site defenses Entrance to site Emergency exit oa aooow Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Plotted proposed site on map 2 Performed site reconnaissance 3 Selected site within 100 meters of 8 digit grid coordinate given in team packet OPORD 4 Draw site plan showing as ne Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 3 180 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related TM 11 5820 1022 13 1 TM 11 5820 1023 13 1 TM 11 5820 864 12 1 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 TM 11 5820 934 13 1 1 12 August 2008 3 181 Chapter 4 Duty Position Tasks ADDITIONAL SKILL IDENTIFIER ASI J2 Communications Cable and Antenna Systems Maintainer Subject Area 20 ANTENNA INSTALLATION INSTALL PRESSURIZED CABLE SYSTEM 113 588 1086 Conditions Given conditions and standards required to ins
11. PERFORM UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON ELECTRICAL CABLE TEST SET AN GTM 12 113 574 3010 Conditions Given telephone test set AN GTM 12 a 4 inch flat tip screwdriver dust brush and cleaning rags DA Form 2404 Form 2408 14 TM 11 6625 3292 12 and DA Pam 750 8 Standards Performed ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the telephone test set was operational or evacuated the defective test set to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps 1 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Perform routine checks Refer to TM 11 6625 3292 12 a Clean wash and dust b Check for frayed cables broken connectors or bent pins c Inspect case and cover for visible damage d Inspect battery pack for damaged connectors torn plastic broken wires or missing Velcro fastener e Check spare fuse pack to ensure that it contains two of each fuse rated 1 2 1 and 2 amps f Tighten loose screws 3 Complete DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 WARNING Do not use ungrounded extension cords when operating the AN GTM 12 with AC power The AN GTM 12 is equipped with a three wire AC power cord that grounds the instrument front panel and case when connected to a grounded AC outlet Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Initiated DA Form 2404 2 Performed routine checks 3 Completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if a
12. eect eeteeeeeenteeeeeenaes 3 60 113 606 1001 Install Multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC or Multiplexer Combiner TD 1234 P TTC 3 62 113 606 1002 Install Line Termination Unit LTU CV 4180 oo ee ee eeeteeeeeenteeeeeeteeeeeeaes 3 63 113 606 3090 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC OR MULTIPLEXER COMBINER TD 1234 P TTC 00 0 cecceeeetteeeeetteeeeeteieeeeetneeeereae 3 65 113 606 3091 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Line Termination Unit LTU CV ANGO lt 2 heresies eReader tite Maes tae hatte dt eh holt ether ain dads ene cee tn Saks ers 3 66 Subject Area 4 TELEPHONE SETS 113 600 1001 Install Secure Digital Telephone STU IMVSTE oo eee ceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeneaas 3 68 113 628 1001 Install Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Telephone eecceeeeneeeeeeesteeeeeeenaes 3 69 113 600 0011 Troubleshoot KY 68 0 00 0 cece AE e e E a AEREE ae TAE AEREE TERE 3 70 113 600 1012 Install Telephone Set TA 312 PT 0 ceecceeeeeeeeee scene ee eeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeteeeaeeeteeaeeeeeeaaees 3 71 113 600 1016 Install Digital Nonsecure Voice Terminal DNVT cecceeeeeteeeeeeetteeeeeenieeeeeeaes 3 73 113 600 1017 Install Telephone Set TA 838 TT cecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaees 3 75 113 600 1022 Install KY 68 o oo eee eeeeeee ee eene ee eee EnA Ea KEREN aA OES EEDA ETER EAE 3 76 113 600 3017 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Telephone Set TA 312 PT
13. 2 Phase B Red 3 Phase D Blue 4 Neutral White or Gray 5 Ground Green f Ensure conduit and boxes are not used as protective ground circuit in branch circuit Note When terminating 240 V AC single phase 3 wire where the hot conductors are all black the L 2 conductor must be identified at the terminating location a label 4 Inspect electrical devices a Inspect circuit protection devices 1 Ensure correct type of fuse is in use a Plug type has lowest amperage rating 0 30 Note There are four types standard time delay S type and circuit breaker b Cartridge fuses increase in amperage rating with size Note 1 This does not eliminate the possible replacement with the wrong amperage Note 2 There are two types ferrule contact 30 60 amps and knife blade contact 60 amps 2 Inspect circuit breakers for correct function Note Three types of circuit breakers single pole double pole and triple pole 3 Inspect the ground fault circuit interrupter GFCI if used Must be used within 6 feet of any water source One can control more than one receptacle b Inspect receptacles 1 Inspect rating for correct amperage and voltage 2 Inspect that receptacles do not have lower amperage rating than the branch circuit it is installed with 3 Inspect receptacles for mounting with ground screw in up position 4 Inspect receptacle color codes a The BRASS colored screw is used for HOT b The SILVER co
14. 3 90 Required The National Electric Code NEC Related 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL DISTRIBUTION FRAMES 113 583 1003 Conditions Given a MDF intermediate distribution frame IDF or combined distribution frame CDF tools and notes Standards Installed a distribution frame Performance Steps 1 Identify the purpose of distribution frames a Distribution frames are necessary to protect and support the cable cross connects and the ground buss bar b Distribution frames provide a point of permanent termination for outside and inside cables c Distribution frames provide temporary connection cross connects between outside and inside cables to and from fixed equipment 2 Identify the construction of a distribution frame a Distribution frames are normally made of an open metal framework of steel with cross members that form vertical and horizontal arms b Frames require a minimum clearance of 36 inches from the sides and ends for maintenance c Components of a frame 1 Floor angle Attaches to the floor and supports the verticals uprights The length of each angle depends on the number of verticals it mounts and may require several floor angles to complete a frame 2 Top angle Secures the top of the verticals uprights 3 Verticals uprights Are the basic support framework and are fastened on 8 inch centers 4 Diagonal brace A brace welded to the protector mounting bar and the verti
15. Checked for dancing cable N Checked suspension strand 3 156 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2407 12 August 2008 3 157 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PREPARE A DETAILED CABLE ROUTE MAP 113 588 6007 Conditions Given map sheet s covering the area of operations coordinates of all termination points protractor graphic training aid GTA 5 2 10 overlay sheet a completed wire plan with all changes annotated FM 3 25 26 FM 24 1 TC 24 20 and FM 1 02 Standards Annotated terminal points line routes construction symbols and all marginal information on the overlay Performance Steps 1 o Place the overlay material over the map area to be annotated Refer to FM 3 25 26 Secure material to the map 2 3 4 Register the material to the map Plot the position of the terminal using authorized military symbols Refer to FM 3 25 26 FM 1 02 and FM 24 1 Plot line routes and construction symbols Refer to FM 3 25 26 FM 24 1 and TC 24 20 Enter marginal information Refer to FM 3 25 26 Turn into company operations Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 N O oO A W N Placed the over
16. Review maintenance records for any hazards 4 Supervise cable installation performance to standard 5 Fill out and submit any required safety reports as necessary Evaluation Preparation Prior to testing Have a team minimum of two of cable systems installer maintainers available to install cable Have all equipment reference material and forms available for use Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier you will be evaluating him her on their ability to supervise basic safety using the risk management process Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Reviewed EIP and installation diagrams equipment and facility requirements for safety issues 2 Supervised inspection of equipment 3 Supervised inspection of facility 4 Supervised cable installation performance to standard 9 Filled out and submitted any required safety reports as necessary Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier GO if all the PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are performed correctly References Required Related AR 25 2 Manufacturer s Manuals 3 146 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT INSTALLATION OF CABLE WIRE SYSTEMS 113 588 7008 Conditions Given a requirement for cable wire systems installation using WD 1 TT WF 16 U or standard cable systems Stand
17. SML Special tools and test equipment will be included a Major Item BOM MIBOM consists of major end items b Installation BOM IBOM consists of all the materials required to install the MIBOM c Upon completion of a project the Operations and Maintenance O amp M Command will sign for the MIBOM 4 Project Concurrence Memorandum PCM a The PCM describes the project site impact responsibilities scope schedule suspense dates agreements and project concurrence from all responsible agencies b Additional attachments and enclosures will be referenced by the appropriate paragraph 5 CRL 6 Identify drawings a The drawing index will be the first page of the appendix for drawings b Standard drawings are drawings used by installers at all communications electronics C E facilities to install specific equipment or systems 7 Standard drawing numbering system consists of eleven characters assigned by the CMO a Part 1 First three positions are always STD for standard drawings b Part 2 Position 4 is a one position separator a hyphen to separate parts 1 amp 3 c Part 3 Two positions for the major function code which uses a two letter code to describe the drawing function d One position that is a separator a hyphen to separate parts 3 amp 5 e Four positions used for a four digit drawing number EXAMPLE STD MW 1234 8 Site Specific Drawings a The first sheet in the set of drawings will be the d
18. Snap a chalk line through points A1 to extend the original line on the other side of the obstruction 7 Draft an overhead layout a Using the methods previously described lay out the lines or points for ceiling locations on the floor b Transfer the lines and points from the floor to the ceiling using a plumb bob and a square Wrap the free end of the plumb line around the long side of a carpenter s square and lower the plumb bob to the floor c Hold the square against the ceiling and adjust as necessary to align the plumb bob to the reference mark on the floor d When the plumb bob is aligned with the mark on the floor mark the point where the plumb bob line contacts the ceiling e If space and height will permit a scaffold or maintenance platform can be used to speed up the process 8 Draft a wall layout The points and lines to install equipment on walls are also marked using a plumb bob and level a Determine the distance check EIP of the side of the equipment to be installed from a wall or other reference point Measure and mark this point on the floor in line with the wall location If obstructions prevent marking the location on the floor the point may be marked on the wall at the approximate height of the equipment b Determine the distance from the floor to the bottom or center as applicable of the equipment and mark it on the wall c Plumb a line on the mark made denoting the side of the equipment and make addi
19. Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 12 August 2008 3 57 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related ANSI TIA EIA 568B ANSI TIA EIA 569A Manufacturer s Manuals 3 58 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 3 MULTIPLEXERS TROUBLESHOOT MULTIPLEXER TD 1233 P TTC OR MULTIPLEXER COMBINER TD 1234 P TTC 113 606 0105 Conditions Given multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC or multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC cable CX 11230A G telephone set s TA 838 TT or equivalent DNVT TA 1042 or equivalent telephone cable WF 16 U power cord batteries BA 30 or BA 3042 for TA 838 TT or equivalent assorted circuit card assembly CCA cards TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 650 12 TM 1 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 and TM 11 5995 208 10 Standards Corrected the fault and reestablished communications Performance Steps Refer to TM 11 5805 706 12 for the TD 1233 P TTC and to TM 11 5805 707 12 for the TD 1234 P TTC for all performance steps 1 Check all CCA switches for correct configuration Determine the trouble Initiate self test Localize fault Correct fault or replace defective equipment O oa A W N Reestablish communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Checked all CCA switches for correct configuration Determined the trouble Initiated self test Localized fault aes oa Corrected fault or replaced defective equipment O oa A
20. TM 11 3895 203 15 11 3895 202 13 and TM 11 3895 209 14 Note This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation under all weather conditions it may be performed in a chemical biological radiological and nuclear CBRN environment Standards Correctly inspected the recovery of the system Performance Steps 1 Inspect the recovery of wire or aerial field cable CX 11230 A G a Wire 1 Inspect wire to ensure all tags are removed 2 Inspect wire to ensure all ties are untied 3 Inspect serviceability of recovered wire a Passes physical tests b Passes electrical tests c No more than 4 splices per 1 2 mile b Cable CX 11230 A G 1 Inspect all tags are removed 2 Inspect for serviceability and cleanliness 2 Inspect the recovery of buried wire or field cable CX 11230 A G a Wire 1 Inspect wire to ensure all tags are removed 2 Inspect wire to ensure all ties are untied 3 Inspect serviceability of recovered wire a Passes physical tests b Passes electrical tests c No more than 4 splices per 1 2 mile b Cable CX 11230 A G 1 Inspect all tags are removed 2 Inspect for serviceability and cleanliness 3 Inspect the disconnection of connectors and replacement of the cap assembly on connectors 4 Inspect the removal of pulse form restorers and tags Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected the recovery of wire or aerial field cable CX 11230 A G 2 Inspected the
21. TM 11 5805 201 12 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON TELEPHONE SET TA 838 TT 113 600 3020 Conditions Given an operational telephone set TA 838 TT screwdriver clean cloth DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 and TM 11 5805 650 1 2 Standards Preformed ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the telephone set was operational or evacuated the defective telephone set to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps 1 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Perform routine checks Refer to TM 11 5805 650 12 CAUTION Do not use solvents to clean any part of the telephone set Clean dust and wash Check for frayed cables Store unused items Cover unused receptacles Check for loose nuts bolts and screws 3 Check telephone set TA 838 TT Binding posts Battery compartment Carrying sling and tie down strap Operational capabilities Urgent maintenance work order a2008 9 O09QA0Q 08 4 Check completeness 5 Check handset retaining spring 6 Complete DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Evaluation Preparation Setup Have another TA 838 TT perform the operational test Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier that maintenance and an operational test must be performed on the TA 838 TT Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Initiated DA Form 2404 2 Performed routine checks
22. a Manually b Vehicle c Capstan Remove hook from snatch block Remove davit MX 1215 U from top horizontal member Remove guy anchors using one of the following methods a Manually b Vehicle Remove anchors from position Remove triangular frame from tower section AB 208 U Remove ground from tower Remove tower section AB 208 U Disassemble tower sections AB 208 U and AB 207 U Remove tower support base plates AB 206 U from foundation timbers 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures 1 O OO N O oO A OO N aX cok e M Oo N gt Removed light set MK 221 G or MK 222 G Removed antenna support AB 296 U Lowered antenna support AB 296 G Removed antenna support AB 296 G Removed tension guy wires from tower Removed guy spacer and take up winch from anchors Removed guys from tower Removed tower section from existing tower and transferred parts as required Lowered tower section using one of the three methods Removed hook from snatch block Removed davit MX 1215 U from top horizontal member Removed guy anchors using a vehicle or manually Removed anchors from position 14 15 16 17 18 Removed triangular frame from tower section AB 208 U Removed ground from tower Removed tower section AB 208 U Disassembled tower sections AB 208 U Removed tower support base plates AB 206 U from foundation timbers Evaluation Guidance Score the
23. and capstan 4 Inspect ground obstruction marker Do NOT damage the load contact relay when the relay contacts are cleaned TO 9QA000fM Inspect obstruction lamps Check all interconnecting cables and connectors for cracks and breaks Check control assembly Clean obstruction components Check electron tube Adjust timer beacon as required Lubricate shaft bearing and cam Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures 1 Inspected tower safety devices 2 Maintained guyed supported tower 3 Maintained tower 4 Inspected ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Antenna Safety Manual DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 12 August 2008 4 35 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN SELF SUPPORT TOWER 113 596 3021 Conditions Given self support tower installed tool equipment TE 21 tool equipment TE 27 ground obstruction marker screwdriver set pliers adjustable wrench open end wrench level tape measure knife safety equipment carrier rail installed DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 FM 11 487 27 and the antenna safety manual Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight h
24. multiplexing unit TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P TM 11 5810 329 10 TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Standards Team Chief verified that cable team members had placed a secure call for the originating station to a receiving station Performance Steps 1 Verify the installation of battery Note Replace battery BA 1372 or BA 5372 every six months 2 Coordinate the installation of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 using telephone cable WF 16 U to connect to the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC 3 Spot check the grounding of the DVST TSEC KY 68 4 Supervise loading variables into the DSVT TSEC KY 68 a KYK 13 TSEC b KYK 15 15A c AN CYX 10 5 Supervise the operation of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 to initiate an outgoing secure call Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified the installation of battery 2 Coordinated the installation of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 using telephone cable WF 16 U to connect to the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC 3 Spot checked the grounding of the DVST TSEC KY 68 4 Supervised loading variables into the DSVT TSEC KY 68 5 Supervised the operation of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 to initiate an outgoing secure call Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctl
25. pliers File any sharp edges before installing conduit 13 Identify conduit bends a The major bends 3 120 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 1 Offset Two equal bends in opposite directions example two bends of 22 1 2 degrees are used to change direction of travel 2 Saddle Three bends the A bend of 45 degrees and the B and C bend of 22 1 2 degrees each is used to clear an obstacle on a surface 3 Angles Used to change the direction of travel in a run b The minor bends 1 Regular 90 degree Used to change direction of travel by 90 degrees 2 Stub 90 degree Used in a confined area to change the direction of travel by 90 degrees 14 Identify types of conduit benders a The three types of conduit benders are manual hydraulic and mechanical b The type used depends on the type and size of conduit to be bent c There are two types of manual benders one for EMT and the other for rigid conduit d The one shot bender is a manual bender 1 Used mainly with EMT but can be used for rigid It is called the one shot because a full 90 degrees bend can be made in a single motion 2 It consists of two parts the bender head and the detachable handle 3 The bender head forward part is called the TOE The rear or back part is the HEEL The bender also has conduit alignment and degree markings on the head 4 The arrow mark is used for offsets B and C bends of a saddle angle bends and Stub 90
26. they shall not exceed 20 degrees and the offset distance shall not be more than 4 inches 10 When splicing threaded rod is necessary the ends of the threaded rod will be butted together inside the splice coupling so the ends can be seen through the sight hole b Floor or equipment cable rack support 1 Metal support channel on top of equipment cabinets frames relay racks or bays can be used to support cable rack 2 Cable rack that goes down to the floor is supported by cable rack feet attached to the ends of the stringers with straight clamps 3 When a vertical cable rack passes through a floor to another level the cable rack must be secured to each floor it passes through to prevent overloading the lowest support c Vertical Wall cable rack support 1 Vertical building structural members such as walls or columns can be used to support rack 2 If prefabricated brackets are unavailable steel angles braced by threaded rod may be used 3 Framing bar can support a load up to three feet past its last support 4 If necessary the framing bar may be extend to the wall and supported with a wall mounted bracket d Mutual cable rack 1 Used to support a cable rack perpendicular or parallel to another cable rack 2 The maximum of 18 inches between the two racks is allowed 3 The load capacity of the upper rack supports must be enough to bear the additional load of the lower rack 4 The upper cable rack hanger
27. 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS INSTALLATION RECORD CSIR 113 588 6008 Conditions Given a CSIR an engineering change request authorization ECRA scenario colored pencils and a symbols and explanation booklet Note Supervision and assistance are available Standards Correctly annotated proposed changes from the ECRA on the CSIR using the correct color pencil to mark changes Performance Steps 1 Identify proposed change s requested 2 Annotate proposed change s a Verify appropriate symbol b Select appropriate colored pencil c Annotate change s on CSIR 3 Submit CSIR to engineer team chief Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified proposed change s requested 2 Annotated proposed change s 3 Submitted CSIR to engineer team chief Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 113 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 7 COMSEC INSTALL TRUNK ENCRYPTION DEVICE 113 609 1002 Conditions Given a KG 94A or KG 194A and image understanding architecture IUA connection cables power source CV 4180A and other associated equipments Standards Installed the TED and it is ready t
28. 3 4 b Fiber optic cable use loss test power meter optical fault finder or optical TDR Inspect that test results were annotated on appropriate network documentation Inspect fault identification Inspect fault isolation Inspect fault repair Inspect engineering installation drawing for correctness Inspect maintenance on LAN WAN system a Inspect for periodic testing procedures b Inspect records for proper recording of network status Performance Measures 1 Inspected network type Information gathered using network documents 2 Inspected visually for missing terminations kinked cable blown fuses and loose connections 3 Inspected to ensure that equipment is off to other networks 4 Inspected testing of cable 5 Inspected annotated test results on appropriate Network Documentation 6 Inspected fault identification 7 Inspected fault isolation 8 Inspected fault repair 9 Inspected engineering installation drawing for correctness 10 Inspected maintenance on LAN WAN system 3 174 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 175 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 1
29. Cover unused receptacles Check for loose nuts bolts and screws Remove dust and loose dirt with clean soft lint free cloth Remove grease fungus and ground in dirt with a solution of water and mild detergent and a dampen cloth g Remove dirt from plugs and connectors with a soft brush h Remove grease from external cables with clean cloth soaked in trichlorotrifluoroethane 4DAQT DM 3 Turn power switch on 4 Perform BITE test a Pass equipment is operational b Fail 5 Complete DA Forms 2404 and 2408 14 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Initiated DA Form 2404 2 Performed routine checks on the LTU 3 Turned power switch on 4 Performed BITE test 5 Completed DA Forms 2404 and 2408 14 3 66 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 783 13 amp P 12 August 2008 3 67 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 4 TELEPHONE SETS INSTALL SECURE DIGITAL TELEPHONE STU III STE 113 600 1001 Conditions Given secure terminal equipment STE telephone encryption card tactical or commercial phone line C b
30. Flags or flagmen c Warning signs 2 Remove manhole cover 3 Test manhole atmosphere a Oxygen deficiency b Carbon monoxide 4 Ventilate manhole if required a Artificial b Natural Evaluation Preparation Setup None Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier that he is graded only on his assigned portion of the task Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Placed warning devices 2 Removed manhole cover 3 Tested manhole atmosphere 4 Ventilated manhole if required Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturers Manuals 12 August 2008 3 41 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL A CONNECTOR ON A STRANDED FLEXIBLE COAXIAL CABLE 113 588 1106 Conditions Given a section of coaxial cable connector hand tool set solder soldering iron knife or tubing cutter clean damp cloth safety glasses and a Manufactures Manual Standards Installed the connector on the coaxial cable without deficiencies Note Let Soldier know assistance is available Performance Steps O OO N O oO A OO N gt _ Remove all jewelry for this task Notify Soldier of safety concerns while operating a soldering iron Inventory connector parts C
31. GO 1 Dug hole for pole and anchor Raised pole and set in hole Faced straightened and centered pole Backfilled and tamped the earth around pole Installed anchor Backfilled and tamped the earth firmly around anchor Attached guy to pole Attached guy to anchor rod o ON O o A W N Tightened guy 12 August 2008 3 37 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 9 2320 289 20P 3 38 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL AERIAL CABLE SPLICING EQUIPMENT 113 588 1074 Conditions Given tool equipment TE 21 manila rope 1 2 inch diameter aerial handline extension ladder slack puller wire clamps gloves splicing platform cable car splicer s umbrella wrench pliers splicer s scissors FM 11 372 1 FM 11 372 8 and TC 24 20 Note This task is performed during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Supervision and assistance are available Standards Positioned the splicing equipment and made all safety checks Performance Steps WARNING Installer should be careful when erecting aerial splicing equipment to prevent com
32. GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5825 291 13 3 2 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 2 CABLE AND EQUIPMENT PERFORM CABLE MARKING PROCEDURES 113 588 2002 Conditions Given cable tags manual label marker and mechanical portable label maker Training Circular TC 24 20 engineering installation package EIP appropriate operation order OQPORD and ANSI TIA EIA 606 A Standards Labeled the cable correctly in accordance with OPORD EIP TC 24 20 and ANSI TIA EIA 606 A Performance Steps 1 Mark cables a Marking cables is necessary to identify them during installation and to aid in troubleshooting after the installation is complete Identifying cables is also necessary for future planning and system upgrades b Temporarily marking cables can be done for the cable running process and then replaced with permanent labels once the cables are terminated c Cables will be marked at both ends with two separate permanent identifications labels These labels are not to be removed 1 The first marker label TO will be placed within 12 inches of the connector and will indicate the bay equipment shelf terminal block or position as defined in the cable running list CRL 2 The second marker label FROM will be placed within 2 inches
33. Given aluminum tape asbestos blanket for heat shield cable clamps carding brush channel pulling tool chipping knife E pressure flange friction tape hammer heat gun heat shrinkable split sleeve lash wire clamp metal channel lengths neoprene tape P compound and B compound propane torch retaining clip 5 inch rubber cement shave hook skinning knife slack puller if required splice case splicing kit heat shrinkable sleeve steel strap tabbing shears and vinyl tape Note Supervision and assistance are available Standards Repaired the plastic sheathed cable and sealed the damaged section Performance Steps 1 Repair minor sheath damage to aerial buried and underground plastic sheathed cable if required a b c Repair plastic cable sheath Repair filled plastic cable Repair plastic sheath on pressurized cable 2 Perform a section replacement on a 25 pair plastic sheath plastic insulated cable if required xu QO naow Select the location for the new cable installation Install new cable section temporarily Remove all hardware from preexisting cable Secure the new cable section Make splice opening Install shield bond clamp and install bond braid Install end plate on new section of cable Seal splice temporarily Establish talk circuit Half tap splice in new cable Wrap finished splice 3 Repair plastic sheathed aerial buried and underground cable with major dam
34. Glossary 1 STP 11 25L13 SM TG DPAS DSVT DTG DTTS DVOW E e g ECRA FREQ freq FT FTF GAA GFCI GPS MAC MACOM MCF MDF METL MHz MIBOM MIL STD MO MOOTW MOS MOW Glossary 2 Digital Patch Access System digital subscriber voice terminal date time group Data Transmission Test Set digital voice orderwire Europe for example engineering change request authorization Electronics Industries Alliance Engineering Installation Package electromagnetic interference electrical magnetic protection electrical metallic tubing et cetera and so forth frequency modulation field manual when used with a number fiber optic cable assembly fiber optic modem fiber optic transmission system frequency foot feet FOCA Test Facility automotive and artillery ground fault circuit interrupter gigahertz Global Positioning System Graphic Training Aid high frequency horse power hertz that is in accordance with Installation Bill of Material identification intermediate distribution frame Internet protocol insulation resistance image understanding architecture kilohertz keyboard unit kilowatt local area network line of sight liquid tight flexible conduit line termination unit maintenance allocation chart major Army command Maintenance Orderwire MOW Communications Facility main distribution frame mission essential task list megahertz major item bill of material Military Standard Monthly fre
35. Inspect for appropriate TMs b Inspect completed maintenance forms 2 Verify operation of test set a Check the TRANSMIT ADJUST knob clockwise to ensure a number greater than 30 on the digital display 1 If 30 or greater continue 2 If less than 30 have Soldier clean connectors and retry until acceptable level is noted b Check the digital display for optical power level available to the RECEIVE port 1 Greater than 30 means the test set is functioning correctly 2 Less than 30 have Soldier clean and retry Note Test set display must be zeroed at each test location prior to measuring attenuation so that test results are accurate 3 Verify reference point of the ATTENUATION MODE 4 Verify the results of cable test are recorded correctly Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected ULM on identified fiber optic test set 2 Verified operation of test set 3 Verified the reference point of the ATTENUATION MODE 4 Verified the results of the cable test were recorded correctly Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 5988 E DA Pam 750 8 3 152 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT SPLICING OF FIBER OPTIC C
36. Inspected the antenna lubricated the gearbox fittings performed the VSWR test and completed DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Steps 1 Inspect tower safety devices a Check climbing belts for cuts frays and cracks b Check climbing sleeve bearing c Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension e Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Maintain guyed supported tower CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before work is performed on the tower Check tower for loose hardware Check tower for rust Inspect tower footing for loose hardware Check to ensure that tower is plumb tension guys as required Check tower ground for corrosion and loose hardware D9na0q0 08 Note Reconnect radio equipment f Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Maintain antenna a Check antenna boom and elements for corrosion b Inspect antenna boom and elements for loose hardware Note It may be necessary to lower the antenna to tighten hardware or clean corrosion c Check insulators 1 Element mounts for cracks 2 Fiberglass tubes for cracks breaks 4 24 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps d Check lubrication of rotator gearbox Note Oil should be replaced after 240 hours of
37. Install inner sheath clamps 5 Install temporary bonding CAUTION Gloves should be worn when removing metal sheath c Open polyethylene covered cable isolated 1 Remove cable sheath 2 Remove metal sheath except two strips 3 Fold back and tape metal strips 12 August 2008 3 53 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 4 Install inner sheath clamps CAUTION Gloves should be worn when removing metal sheath 3 Expose conductors a Separate binding groups b Mark binding groups color code 4 Prepare conductors for splicing by drying out wet cable using heat gun method CAUTION Desiccant should NOT be used on plastic or rubber insulated conductors 5 Splice video cable a Regular shield cable 1 Straight splice 2 Butt splice 3 Regular shield cable spliced to terminal stub b Flexible shield cable 1 Flexible shield cable only 2 Splice to paper insulated cable c Regular shield video cable spliced to other cables 1 Nonflexible shield 2 Flexible shield Evaluation Preparation Setup None Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier that he will be graded only on his assigned portion of the task Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Prepared cables for splice opening 2 Opened cable 3 Exposed conductors 4 Prepared conductors for splicing by drying out wet cable using heat gun method 5 Spliced video cable Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PM
38. National Electric Code NEC TB 385 4 TM 9 243 12 August 2008 3 107 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TROUBLESHOOT LOCAL AREA NETWORK WIDE AREA NETWORK LAN WAN SUBSTATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 113 588 0001 Conditions Given a preexisting LAN or WAN ohmmeter spectrum analyzer time domain reflectometer loss test set power meter optical faultfinder network documents and Manufacture Instructional Booklets Standards Identified and repaired faults and reestablished communications Performance Steps 1 O Oo N OQ A Gather network type information using network documents Make visual inspection checks of network 2 3 4 Turn off equipment to other networks Test cable according to type a Metallic cable ohmmeter spectrum analyzer or time domain reflectometer b Fiber optic cable loss test power meter optical fault finder or optical time domain reflectometer Annotate test results on the appropriate network documentation Identify fault Isolate fault Repair fault Maintain an engineering installation drawing Maintain LAN WAN system a Conduct periodic systems test b Annotate appropriate network records Performance Measures 1 O N O o A OO N _ Gathered network type information using network documents Made visual inspection checks of network Turned off equipment to other networks Tested cable according to type Annotated test results on the app
39. PMs until they are done correctly 3 170 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related ANSI TIA EIA 568B ANSI TIA EIA 569A FM 11 50 Manufacturers Manuals 12 August 2008 3 171 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT REPAIR OF FIBER OPTIC CABLE ASSEMBLY FOCA CX 13295 G 113 632 9010 Conditions Given a CX 13295 G FOCA with at least one splice retermination or replacement completed and a TS 4335 G Standards Inspected the repair of the FOCA and determined if the repair was correct and within acceptable tolerances Performance Steps 1 Inspect repair of cable 2 Test cable with test set TS 4335 G a Ensure when connecting cables that fiber optic connector is mated to another fiber optic connector Note If the local end of the FOCA does not have a washer between the bend limiter and adapter bushing the fiber under test is the same color as the lead connected to the TRANSMIT port If the local end of the FOCA does have a washer between the bend limiter and adapter bushing the fiber under test is not the same color as the lead connected to the TRANSMIT port b Record results in accordance with DA Pam 750 8 3 Check attenuation level for acceptance a Check for maximum of 3 0 dB for a 300 meter FOCA b Check for maximum of 3 75 dB for a 1000 meter FOCA c Record results in accordance with DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected repair of cable 2 Tested the cable with tes
40. PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related AR 25 2 Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 139 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Skill Level 3 Subject Area 12 CABLE AND EQUIPMENT INSPECTION INSPECT INSTALLATION OF AC DC POWER SOURCE FOR COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT 113 588 7001 Conditions Given installed AC or DC circuit proper test equipment the National Electric Code NEC and the engineering installation package EIP Standards Correctly inspected for correct installation of AC DC circuits in accordance with the NEC and the EIP Performance Steps 1 Inspect AC power distribution system a Inspect line feeders from service pole to service entry panel SEP b Inspect branch feeders from SEP to the distribution panel c Inspect single phase 3 wire and feeder color code 1 L 1 Hot Black 2 L 2 Hot Black Note L 2 must be temporarily marked to distinguish L 1 from L 2 3 Neutral White or Gray 4 Ground Green d Inspect three phase four wire branch feeder code 1 L 1 Hot Black 2 L 2 Hot Black Note Conductor should be permanently marked at each end with red colored tape 3 L 3 Hot Black Note Conductor should be permanently marked at each end with blue colored tape 4 Neutral White or Gray 5 Ground Green e Inspect SEP 1 Inspect that the neutral and protective ground feeder buss are both terminated at the SEP 2 Inspect that the protective ground feeder
41. Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Initiated DA Form 2404 2 Performed routine checks on the TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC 3 Powered on i seed 4 Performed BITE test oo 5 Completed DA Form 2404 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 12 August 2008 3 65 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON LINE TERMINATION UNIT LTU CV 4180 113 606 3091 Conditions Given an LTU CV 4180 dust brush cleaning rags cleaning solvent Ttrichlorotrifluoroethane DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 and TM 11 5805 783 138P Standards Performed ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the equipment was operational or evacuated the defective equipment to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps WARNING Trichlorotrifluoroethane fumes can cause severe irritation or injury Provide ventilation whenever it is used Do not use solvent near heat or open flame 1 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Perform routine checks on the LTU Check for damaged or frayed cables Store items not in use
42. Perform Soldering Techniques UNIT AN 1 3 113 583 1002 Install Cable Rack and Wire Way UNIT AN 1 3 113 583 1003 Install Distribution Frames UNIT AN 1 3 113 583 1004 Install Anchoring Devices UNIT AN 1 3 113 583 1007 Interpret Engineering Installation Package EIP UNIT SA 1 3 113 583 1008 Perform Marking Site Layout AIT AN 1 3 113 583 1009 Install Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN AIT SA 1 3 Substation Distribution System 113 583 2001 Operate Hand and Power Tools UNIT AN 1 3 113 588 0001 Troubleshoot Local Area Network Wide Area Network AIT SA 1 3 LAN WAN Substation Distribution System 113 588 0020 Determine Cable Depth Using the 2273 Advanced Cable and AIT AN 1 3 Fault Locator 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG CRITICAL TASKS Task Number Title Training Location 113 588 0021 113 588 6008 Locate Cable Faults Using a Time Domain Reflectometer TDR Test Set Maintain a Communications Systems Installation Record CSIR Subject Area 7 COMSEC 113 609 1002 113 609 2002 113 609 3001 Install Trunk Encryption Device Operate Trunk Encryption Device Maintain Trunk Encryption Device Subject Area 8 Conduit 113 583 1010 Install Conduit Skill Level 2 Subject Area 9 Cable and Equipment Supervision 113 588 7005 113 588 7006 113 588 7012 113 632 9014 113 574 7014 113 606 7026 113 606 7027 113 606 7028 Supervise Recovery of Cable Wire Systems Supervise Troubleshooting of Cable
43. Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 4 17 STP 11 25L13 SM TG REMOVE BROADBAND DIPOLE HIGH FREQUENCY HF ANTENNA 113 596 1086 Conditions Given broadband dipole HF antenna installed tools and equipment safety equipment and telephone maintenance truck M 876 Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Removed the broadband dipole HF antenna and disassembled all support poles guys and anchors Performance Steps WARNING The supervisor will brief Soldiers on climbing procedure and being watchful of falling objects 1 Remove support guys 2 Lower support poles with dipole antenna 3 Remove dipole from support poles Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Removed support guys 2 Lowered support poles with dipole antenna 3 Removed dipole from support poles Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until t
44. Ta Cleaved fiber ends Polished fiber oa NO a F YO DN Tested fiber connector and cable Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturers Manual TB 385 4 12 August 2008 3 23 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SPLICE COMMERCIAL FIBER OPTIC CABLE 113 632 4002 Conditions Given a section of fiber optic cable splicer s hand tools cleaving tools polishing adapter reagent alcohol microscope mechanical splice workstation equipment Norland optical adhesive Fiberlok 2501 assembly tool fiber optic fusion splicer safety glasses and manufacture s manuals Standards Inspected the fiber optic cable as indicated by manufacture s manuals and restored communications Performance Steps 1 Identify splicing technique a Norland ultra violet curing UVC optical splice b AMP optimate mechanical fiber optic splice c Fusion splice d Fiberlok optical splice Set up workstation and equipment according to splicing technique Prepare fiber cable according to splicing technique Splice fiber cable according to splicing technique Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 2 3 4 Identified splicing technique Set up workstation and equipment acc
45. W N Reestablished communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 650 12 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 TM 11 5995 208 10 12 August 2008 3 59 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TROUBLESHOOT LINE TERMINATION UNIT LTU CV 4180 113 606 0106 Conditions Given a pre installed LTU CV 4180 and TM 11 5805 783 13 amp P Standards Preformed troubleshooting procedures identified the problems took corrective action and reestablished communications Note To properly troubleshoot the LTU as a stand alone unit it must first be taken off line This is accomplished by turning off the LTU and setting the Group Modem Cable Length to position 5 so that the group modem function is internally looped back Also the LTU must be connected to a trunk encryption device TED or have the TED bypass cable installed TED red cable connected from J1 J4 on the rear panel Performance Steps 1 Verify that trouble exists 2 Verify that the LTU has power 3 Conduct pre troubleshooting checks a Check that the Master Slave switch on the TIMTG CCA is in the slave position b Check that the TIMBT CCA functional configuration switch is set to 2 c Check that the front panel
46. Where a duct run terminates it shall be supported within 1 foot of the end d Universal hanger can be used to mount duct to the ceiling walls or floor e Duct can be supported using a trapeze style support made with Unistrut or similar material f Wireway may be supported in a combination of approved methods 10 Identify restrictions of wireway a Power cables 1 Cannot exceed 600 volts 3 88 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 2 The total number of conductors cannot exceed 20 percent of the cross sectional area or contain more than 30 conductors at any given point 3 The wireway must not be filled more than 75 percent of its cross sectional area where taps and splices are made b Communications cable 1 The total number of conductors cannot exceed 30 percent of the cross sectional area at any one point and there is no restriction on the number of conductors 2 Communications cable splices and taps have the same restrictions as power splices and taps 11 Install wireway couplings a Couplings must be secured on at least three sides with screws and star washers The screw heads should always be on the inside of wireway b Always tighten screws nuts as tightly as possible to give maximum mechanical rigidity and electrical continuity c Fittings and hardware for wireway All unused openings must be sealed 1 Closing plates are used to seal the ends of ducts or fittings 2 Telescope fi
47. and grounding of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 3 Directed the loading of variables into the DSVT using the KYK 13 TSEC 4 Directed the operation of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5810 329 10 12 August 2008 3 161 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT TROUBLESHOOTING OF KY 68 113 600 7046 Conditions Given digital subscriber voice terminal DSVT TSEC KY 68 telephone cable WF 16 U multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC radio repeater set AN TRC 138A radio terminal set AN GRC 173 radio repeater set AN TRC 174 radio terminal set AN TRC 175 TM 11 5810 329 10 TM 11 5820 864 12 1 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 and TM 11 5820 931 12 1 Note 1 This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation under all weather conditions it may be performed in an NBC environment Note 2 The DSVT TSEC KY68 is classified equipment It should be handled properly Standards Directed troubleshooting of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 identifying problems and correcting the fault s Performance Steps 1 Direct the troubleshooting of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system 2 Direct the identification of fault s on the DSVT TSEC K
48. and must be cut to length c Flexible conduit must be supported every 4 1 2 feet and within 12 inches of any box cabinet or fitting 12 August 2008 3 117 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps d Conductor voltage inside the flexible conduit is limited to 600 volts e Flex conduit cannot be used outdoors in wet areas underground embedded in concrete in battery rooms hazardous locations or in such areas where flammable or corrosive vapors are present e Liquid Tight Flexible Conduit LTF 1 When used with liquid tight box connectors the conductors are protected from water and excessive dampness 2 The total length of the run will not exceed 6 feet 3 The characteristics of LTF are a LTF is a steel flex conduit with a covering made of PVC plastic b Conductor voltage inside the flexible conduit is limited to 600 volts c The size and support requirements are the same as flexible conduit d LTF can be used anywhere except it cannot be embedded in concrete 3 Identify rules for conduit Installation a All conduit runs will be mechanically and electrically continuous b All joints between sections of conduit fittings and boxes shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove dust grease oil moisture nonconductive finishes corrosive materials and then firmly tightened Conduit will run vertically or horizontally on walls floors ceilings and in equipment cabinets Conduit can be run beneath cable rack un
49. antenna curtains 3 Removed anchors 4 Disassembled mast section Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 4 15 STP 11 25L13 SM TG REMOVE AB 216 U TOWER 113 596 1084 Conditions Given tower AB 216 U light set MK 221 G or MK 222 G tower erection davit MX 1215 U capstan E 12U tools and equipment safety equipment and telephone maintenance truck M 876 Note This task is performed during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Supervision and assistance are provided as required Standards Removed tower AB 216 U and disassembled all guy wire assemblies anchors and equipment Performance Steps 1 oO oo N DOD oO FP W DN 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 4 16 Remove light set MK 221 G or MK 222 G Remove antenna support AB 296 U Lower antenna support AB 296 G Remove antenna support AB 296 G Remove tension guy wires from tower Remove guy spacer and take up winch from anchors Remove guys from tower Remove tower section from existing tower and transfer parts as required Lower tower section using one of the following methods
50. at the distribution panel and routed directly to the device through the conduit The neutral is never connected to a switch 6 The ground conductor is connected to the designated position on the ground buss bar at the distribution panel and routed through the conduit following the rules for grounding for of all devices on that branch circuit h Wire a three way switch 1 The first terminal is wired to source A hot circuit breaker 2 Both traveler terminals B and D of the first switch are connected to the next switch traveler terminals C and E with a hot conductor red 3 The common terminal F of the second switch is connected to the hot terminal of the device to be controlled 4 The neutral conductor is connected to the designated position on the neutral buss bar at the distribution panel and routed through the conduit to all devices requiring neutral connection for that branch circuit 5 The ground conductor is terminated to the designated position on the ground buss bar at the distribution panel and routed through the conduit following the grounding rules i Wire a four way switch network 1 Connect the common terminal A of a three way switch to the designated circuit breaker source 2 Connect one of the traveler terminals B of this switch to one of the traveler terminals C of a four way switch using a hot conductor black 3 Connect the other side of the three way switch traveler terminal D to the
51. battery BA 1372 or BA 5372 every six months 2 Install the DSVT TSEC KY 68 using telephone cable WF 16 U to connect to the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC 3 Ground the DVST TSEC KY 68 4 Load variables into the DSVT TSEC KY 68 a KYK 13 TSEC b KYK 15 15A c AN CYZ 10 5 Operate the DSVT TSEC KY 68 to initiate an outgoing secure call Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Installed battery 2 Installed the DSVT TSEC KY 68 using telephone cable WF 16 U to connect to the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC 3 Grounded the DSVT TSEC KY 68 4 Loaded variables into the DSVT TSEC KY 68 5 Operated the DSVT TSEC KY 68 to initiate an outgoing secure call Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P AR 25 55 TM 11 5810 329 10 AR 380 40 TM 11 5805 706 12 DA Pam 25 380 2 TM 11 5805 707 12 TB 380 41 3 76 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON TELEPHONE SET TA 312 PT 113 600 3017 Conditions Given telephone set TA 312 PT battery BA 30 two each tool equipment TE 33 lint free cloth and brush cleaning compound trichlorotrifluoroethane DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA P
52. battery storage areas for proper safety measures 19 Inspected the basic design of the DC power system for full capability 20 Inspected the work site for basic safety precautions Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related AR 25 2 Manufacturer s Manuals The National Electric Code NEC 12 August 2008 3 145 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE BASIC SAFETY IN CABLE SYSTEMS INSTALLATION 113 588 7002 Conditions Given a requirement for cable wire installation a team of Soldiers equipped with cable wire engineering installation package EIP cable route maps and tools MIL STDs LOls OPORDs TMs DA pamphlets and forms Note This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical environment Standards Supervised the installation of cable wire systems in accordance with cable wire diagrams and the EIP Performance Steps 1 Review the EIP and installation diagrams equipment and facility requirements for safety issues 2 Supervise inspection of equipment a Take measures to control eliminate any safety hazards b Review maintenance records for any hazards 3 Supervise inspection of facility a Take measures to control eliminate any safety hazards b
53. be mixed with the 185N compound 3 Install pressure test point a Reinforce cable b Install pressure test valves 1 Install E pressure flange on plastic sheathed cable 4 2 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 2 Install pressure fittings and test valves on lead sheathed cable c Install pressure tubing fittings and accessories 4 Install contactor terminal a Install aerial contactor 1 Modify aerial contactor 2 Adjust aerial contactor 5 Install transducer terminal a Install transducer on sleeve b Install transducer on splice case c Monitor transducer pressure 1 Transducer monitoring 2 Automatic transducer monitoring system d Test cable using pressure testing apparatus 6 Install continuous feed pressure system a Install compressor air dryer unit 1 Install refrigerant type 750 and 7 500 standard cubic feet per day SCFD capacity air dryer Install refrigerant type 5 000 SCFD capacity compressor Make required inspections Start compressor unit Maintain end pressure YS YS wr wa 2 3 4 5 b Adjust air outlet pressure c Install pole mounted air dryer d Test cable pressure 1 Install pressure measuring equipment 2 Flash test for leaks Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Installed bypass Installed pressure plug Installed pressure test point Installed contactor terminal Installed transduc
54. circuitry and from switching sizable currents 2 DC power systems must be adequately filtered and any internally generated noise must be isolated from the communications equipment and the signal reference subsystem of the facility 6 Identify DC power wiring color code a Single voltage arrangement BLACK HOT WHITE RETURN YELLOW REFERENCE b Dual voltage arrangement RED PLUS BLACK HOT WHITE COMMON RETURN YELLOW REFERENCE 7 Install battery racks a Install cells and racks IAW manufacturer s instructions and the EIP b Protective coatings will not be removed from the racks and any bare metal will be re touched with corrosive resistant paint c Absolyte battery systems do not require battery racks Supports are part of the battery module The accessories include installation hardware and operating instructions d The Absolyte battery system can be bolted to the floor wall or both and can be built for earthquake protection A maximum horizontal stack height of 8 modules is recommended for seismic applications and ten modules for non seismic applications 3 16 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 8 Install batteries a The recommended equipment for battery installation is Forklift or portable boom crane Torpedo level plastic Plywood straight edge 1 2 x 4 x 48 Torque wrenches Vinyl electrical tape Paper wipes Scouring pads Box wrenches metric Ratchet set metri
55. ensure planned training is conducted to standard Pre execution checks are a critical portion of any training meeting During preparation for training battalion and company commanders identify and eliminate potential training distracters that develop within their own organizations They also stress personnel accountability to ensure maximum attendance at training 1 Subordinate leaders as a result of the bottom up feed from internal training meetings identify and select the individual tasks necessary to support the identified training objectives Commanders develop the tentative plan to include requirements for preparatory training concurrent training and training resources At a minimum the training plan should include confirmation of training areas and locations training ammunition allocations training simulations and simulators availability transportation requirements Soldier support items a risk management analysis assignment of responsibility for the training designation of trainers responsible for approved training and final coordination The time and other necessary resources for retraining must also be an integral part of the original training plan 2 Leaders trainers and evaluators are identified trained to standard and rehearsed prior to the conduct of the training Leaders and trainers are coached on how to train given time to prepare and rehearsed so that training will be challenging and doctrinally correct Commanders e
56. equipment has been replaced O oa fF W N Verify that communications have been reestablished Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified that all CCA switches were in the correct configuration 2 Verified that the problem had been determined 3 Ensured that the self test had been initiated 4 Verified that the fault had been localized 5 Ensured the fault had been corrected or the defective equipment had been replaced 6 Verified that communications had been reestablished Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 384 12 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 650 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 5995 208 10 3 132 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON MULTIPLEXERS 113 606 7028 Conditions Given individual s multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC and multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC flat tip screwdriver dust brush and cleaning rags trichlorotrifluoroethane DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Standards Supervised that the individual s performed ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the equipment was op
57. equipment in accordance with the EIP Performance Steps 1 Identify the purpose of marking site layout a Equipment must be installed in a facility exactly as shown on the floor plan drawings b Installers must draw lines on the floors walls or ceilings indicating the location of equipment to be installed 2 Identify marking site layout terms a Reference line 1 A straight line in between two or more predetermined points parallel to the longest unbroken wall in a room 2 All measurements for equipment layout markings will be made from the reference line b Baseline The line on which the equipment is placed 1 Equipment may sit in front of center on or behind the baseline 2 Centerline CL usually indicates the centerline on floor plan drawings 3 Baselines may be laid parallel or perpendicular to the reference line 3 Prepare for marking site layout a Verify that the dimensions and reference points on the drawings match the room b When possible lay out and mark an entire room before moving the equipment and installation materials into the room c Use a chalk line 1 Make sure it is sufficiently coated with chalk 2 Stretch the line taut extending the ends a minimum of 6 inches past intersecting lines or the end of the equipment line up 3 The chalk line should be snapped at the approximate center in increments of 10 to 15 feet 4 To avoid bouncing snap the chalk line along the edge
58. he is graded only on his assigned portion of the task Performance Measures 1 Checked pole for defect 2 Checked suspension strand for tension 3 Climbed pole if required Set up ladder if required Removed aerial cable rings or lashing wire if required Terminated cable lashing wire Made proper slack in cable using the slack puller o N O oO A Set up other splicing equipment if required Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related FM 11 372 1 FM 11 372 8 TC 24 20 3 40 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL UNDERGROUND CABLE SPLICING EQUIPMENT 113 588 1075 Conditions Given ventilator blower electrical AC DC 115 V 60 cycle 1 HP generator set 3 kilowatt kW gas engine 60 Hz 1 3 HP 120 208 V SKD TAC utility fire extinguisher carbon dioxide with rubber nozzle charge WHLD 50 Ib manhole cover hooks carbon monoxide detector flags warning signs and barricades Note This task is performed outside a manhole during daylight hours Supervision and assistance are available Standards Made all safety checks tested manhole atmosphere and ventilated the manhole completely Performance Steps 1 Place warning devices a Barricades b
59. if there are blank columns b Under STATUS record in pencil the date in the GO block if the Soldier demonstrated task proficiency to Soldier s manual standards Keep this information current by always recording the most recent date on which the Soldier demonstrated task proficiency Record the date in the NO GO block if the Soldier failed to demonstrate task proficiency to Soldier s manual standards Soldiers who failed to perform the task should be retrained and re evaluated until they can meet the standards When that occurs enter the date in the appropriate GO block and erase the previous entry from the NO GO block B 4 After the Evaluation a Read down each column GO NO GO to determine the training status of that individual This will give you a quick indication on which tasks a Soldier needs training b Read across the rows for each task to determine the training status of all Soldiers You can readily see on which tasks to focus training c Line through the training status column of any Soldier who departs from the unit 12 August 2008 B 1 STP 11 25L13 SM TG ALB TOSEO 3uv SNOILIGa SNOINZd G00z Nf Y S9LS WHOS va SD 00 TANF TORNES Ylrurey yey E GCE s LEERY PD COON OCE JILIL ONY YIJAWNN ASYL ge talint bo a a Pa pro S Jets AAWS E ple SWYN S Y3I010S DOGVUL S AouaGe yuauodoid ayy O L INS OLWZ6 01 dS 29S W40j SIUZJO SN 104 NOILVSI
60. is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 TM 11 6625 3292 12 3 36 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SET POLES 113 588 1002 Conditions Given a 30 foot pole pike poles and pole supports digging tools LC 17 LC 18 and LC 19 digging bar tamping bar LC 3 protective headgear measuring tape or ruler carrying hook and cant hooks anchor and anchor rod expanding rod AH 1 guy strand strand grip s 2 each strand clamp or automatic locking device chain hoist handline tool equipment TE 21 and TE 33 shovel bolt cutter eyebolt telephone maintenance truck and a team of seven Soldiers Standards Prepared and set a pole in the ground and installed one anchor and one guy line Performance Steps WARNING A safety briefing is a must Soldiers working or involved in lifting heavy objects must wear protective headgear and take safety precautions Performance steps 1 and 2 can be performed with the use of a telephone maintenance truck 1 Dig holes for pole and anchor Raise pole and set in hole Face straighten and center pole Backfill and tamp the earth around pole Install anchor Backfill and tamp the earth firmly around anchor Attach guy to pole Attach guy to anchor rod oO ON O Oa A OO N Tighten guy Performance Measures GO NO
61. needle nose pliers Lock a pair of hemostats behind the needle nose pliers d Evenly trim the conductors to 2 inches Then using a pair of lineman pliers twist the bare ends of the conductors in a CLOCKWISE direction so the conductors wrap evenly e After twisting trim the conductors for the proper sized wire nut At least 1 16 inch of insulation must be inside the wire nut 2 The stand alone splice is used when the conductor does not terminate to a device in the box a Measure and cut the conductors 6 inches from the edge of the box and strip off 2 inches of insulation b Cut an 8 inch piece of wire and strip 2 inches of insulation from one end c Using needle nose pliers place the conductors side by side lining up the edges of the insulation d Evenly trim the bare conductors to 2 inches 12 August 2008 3 11 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 12 e Using lineman pliers twist the bare conductors CLOCKWISE The conductors should wrap evenly and be free of nicks f After twisting the conductors trim to fit the correct sized wire nut g Install the wire nut with at least 1 16 inch of insulation inside 3 The jumper splice is used for distributing a single conductor that requires more than one splice a If a conductor is to terminate to a device in the box refer to the wiring procedure for an in the middle splice If no conductors terminate to a device in the box refer to the wiring procedure
62. not put the tool down until it has completely stopped Make sure the tools safety guards are in place and in good working order Everyone in close proximity of the operation should also wear safety equipment Always secure the material to be worked in a vice never hold the material to be cut by hand Do not run the tool while carrying it or holding it at your side rate the reciprocating saw Secure material to be cut in a vice or clamp Some reciprocating saws have a speed control lever Select the appropriate setting for your application Place the hinged foot against the material to be cut Squeeze the trigger to turn the tool on and release the trigger to turn off the tool Do not apply pressure when the saw is close to cutting through The reciprocating saw can be used with different blades for different types of material Match the blade to the material being cut rate the band saw Clamp the stock Make the cut Release the clamp and remove the stock rate the rotary hammer impact hammer Hold the tool by the insulated gripping surfaces when the possibility of contacting hidden live electrical wires exists Do not drill into walls or blind areas where live electrical wiring may exist Always use the side handle for maximum control over torque and kickback reaction Use thick cushioned gloves to limit the vibration caused by the hammer drill action Squeeze the trigger to turn the tool on and
63. of a square 5 To preserve chalked lines retrace them with a grease pencil or a marking crayon sharpened to a fine point To protect the lines place transparent tape over them d Fabricate compasses to draw arcs required for laying out the site 4 Draft a reference line 3 100 a The level and square method 1 Place a carpenter s framing square upright with the short side end butted against the longest unbroken wall so the long side is parallel to the wall 2 Place a level against the long side of the square and adjust the square until it is level keeping the short side end against the wall 3 Mark the point of contact on the floor at the bottom inner edge of the square This mark should be 14 inches from the wall length of the short end of the square 4 Repeat this procedure at least three times to establish a reference line 14 inches from the wall 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps b The Plumb Bob Method 1 Place the long side of a framing square against the wall approximately 3 feet above the floor Plumb the square with a level 2 Drop a plumb line from the short side of the square and mark this point on the floor The plumb bob must be hung from the exact same point on the square each time 3 Mark the floor at a minimum of three locations one near each end of the wall and the third near the center More marks are more accurate and have a better chance detecting deviations in the w
64. on a Plastic Sheath Plastic Insulated Cable ccccccccceceeeeeees 3 9 113 588 2005 Install AC DC Power Source for Communications Equipment 0 eeee 3 11 113 588 2006 Install Cable Wire SySteMS cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeseecaeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeneaes 3 20 113 588 2010 Recover Cable Wire System 0 0 0 ccccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseedeeeeeeneeeeneneeeenenaees 3 21 113 632 4001 Install Commercial Fiber Optic Terminators Connectors ececeeeeeeeeeeeteees 3 22 113 632 4002 Splice Commercial Fiber Optic Cable ececcccccceceeeeeeeeneecaeeeeeeeeeeesnueaeeeeeeeeeteees 3 24 113 574 3006 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Telephone Test Set TS 3647 G 3 25 113 574 3010 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Electrical Cable Test Set ANIGTIM Zorgen iee L eee ea E NAE ETA A 3 27 113 574 3011 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Test Set TS 4117 G oo eee 3 28 113 588 0005 Troubleshoot Telephone Cable WD 1 YTT or WF 16 U 00 0 eee eeeeteeeeeenteeeeeenaes 3 30 113 588 0016 Troubleshoot CX 11230A G Cable System cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaes 3 32 113 588 0018 Troubleshoot 26 Pair Cable CX 4566 G oo eee ccceeneeeee center eeeneeeeeeeetaeeeeeenaeeeeeeaes 3 34 413 588 1002 Set Poles ics E E T E E N se teases eile veiteadeeet A Aah eeeeel te as 3 37 113 588 1074 Install Aerial Cable Splicing Equipment ccccccceeeeeceeceeceeeeee
65. or fitting 4 The characteristics of rigid conduit are a It is moisture proof fireproof and can withstand severe mechanical damage b Conduit is measured by inside diameter and normally comes in 10 foot lengths c There is no limit on the voltage that conductors can carry inside rigid conduit d Lengths come threaded on both ends and must be rethreaded if cut c Electrical Metallic Tubing EMT or Thin wall 1 EMT cannot be threaded therefore it uses fittings that do not require threads to attach to the conduit 2 EMT is approved for both concealed and exposed work in dry locations 3 The characteristics of EMT are a It comes in 10 foot lengths with inside diameters that range from 1 2 inch to 2 inches b The voltage of conductors inside EMT is limited to 600 volts c EMT cannot be used outside of buildings in battery rooms or in excessively damp areas 4 Support is required every 10 feet and within 3 feet of any box cabinet or fitting d Flexible Conduit 1 Flexible conduit is normally used where movement or vibration is experienced such as the connection to motors rectifiers or where it is impractical to use other types of conduit 2 Flexible conduit may be run a maximum of 6 feet 3 The characteristics of flexible conduit are a Flexible conduit is made from a strip of steel that is spirally wound and interlocked on itself b It comes on a reel with inside diameters ranging from 3 8 inch to 3 inches
66. other traveler terminal of the four way switch E using a hot conductor red 4 Connect one of the opposite traveler terminals F of the four way switch to one of the traveler terminals of a second three way switch G with a hot conductor black 5 Connect the last traveler terminal of the four way switch H to the other traveler terminal of the second three way switch I with a hot conductor red 6 Connect the common terminal of the second three way switch J to the device 7 The neutral conductor is connected to the designated position on the neutral buss bar of the distribution panel and routed through the conduit to all devices requiring neutral in that branch circuit 8 The ground conductor is terminated to the designated position on the ground buss bar of the distribution panel and routed through the conduit following all grounding rules j Wire a 120 volts AC V AC duplex receptacle with one or both receptacles switched 1 Connect the common brass terminal of a single throw switch for a switched circuit with a black insulated conductor from the source circuit breaker or splice from a previous circuit 2 Tab 1 B on the receptacle for the two brass terminals must be broken removed when switching only one receptacle and a second hot wire must be ran from the source to the receptacle Tab 1 B must be unbroken intact when switching both receptacles a Connect the other common brass terminal on
67. plans Performance Steps 1 Identify cable rack and wireway a b A cable rack is a ladder like assembly used wherever exposed cable is acceptable It consists of two parallel side members called stringers and cross straps that are welded at regular intervals It comes in widths from 5 to 24 inches and lengths from 10 to 20 feet A cable rack shall be used in full stock lengths wherever possible 2 Plan installation of cable rack and wireway a b C d e Cable racks and wireways shall be installed in accordance with the EIP and applicable drawings Existing equipment building structures and future expansion must be considered during engineering and installation Cable racks should be installed before any other equipment is installed at new sites Cable racks must have proper clearance to provide cable service to equipment and to eliminate any difficulty running and securing cables in the future Installing cable racks close to pipes radiators windows doors or anything that could damage the cables should be avoided 3 Identify cable rack hardware a Straight splicing clamp 1 Straight clamps are used to join lengths of cable rack or to attach feet to the end of a rack 2 The spacing requirement between the ends of the stringers is 3 8 inch minimum to 5 8 inch maximum and the space should be equal on both sides of the bolt 3 A maximum of one splice is allowed between cable rack supports b
68. recovery of buried wire or field cable CX 11230 A G 3 Inspected the disconnection of connectors and replacement of the cap assembly on connectors 12 August 2008 3 149 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO GO 4 Inspected the removal of pulse form restorers and tags 5 Inspected the recovery of field cable using reeling machine RL 207 G Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 701 12 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 5805 702 12 TM 11 3895 203 15 TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 3895 209 14 TM 9 2320 209 10 1 TM 11 5995 208 10 3 150 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT TROUBLESHOOTING OF CABLE WIRE SYSTEMS 113 588 7011 Conditions Given an individual to perform the task on the FOTS terminal two each FOCA CX 13295 G test set TS 4117 G with battery assistants TM 11 6020 200 10 and TM 11 6625 3227 13 amp P Standards Correctly inspected all identified and repaired faults and checked for reestablished communications in accordance with TMs Performance Steps 1 Inspect the testing procedures used to determine if trouble exists 2 Inspect troubleshooting methods for the wire cable IAW TMs 3 Inspect the malf
69. release the trigger to turn off the tool This tool is equipped with a variable speed dial that controls the impact rate and the rotating speed Generally the control should be set to around 5 or 6 for concrete and about 4 for brick The operator can adjust the impact and rotating speed according to the actual application The selector lever allows the tool to be set for drilling and hammering or hammering only Drilling is a two person operation The operator should concentrate on drilling the hole while the assistant helps to keep the drill perpendicular and acts as a safety Do not use dull or damaged bits as they have a tendency to bind in the material Mark the location where the anchoring device is to be installed Center the bit or self drilling anchor over the hole and operate the tool on hammer only until the surface has been penetrated marking the position Place the selector on drilling nammering and drill to the desired depth 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps l m n o Remove the tool from the hole and clean the hole with a blow out bulb Use care in removing the bit after drilling as the bit may be very hot A hammer driven star bit can be used to brake up aggregate when necessary Install the anchoring device according to the manufacture s instructions 5 Operate the Greenlee hydraulic punch driver a b C d Locate the center where the hole will be punched an
70. screw C on the receptacle 2 The Tab B must be unbroken to provide the 120 V AC to the first receptacle terminal A 3 The source L 2 is connected to the opposite brass terminal F to provide the second leg for the 240 V AC receptacle This conductor must be identified as L 2 4 The silver terminal screw D is connected to the neutral white or gray insulated conductor originating at the neutral buss bar or a splice from a previous outlet Only the 120 V AC receptacles require the neutral conductor 5 No Tab should exist at the neutral terminal E If there is a Tab between terminal screws D and F it must be removed or it will cause a direct short 6 The green terminal screw G is connected to the green insulated conductor which originates at the ground buss bar or a splice from a previous outlet 7 All thru box wiring will require in the middle splice For the ground conductors refer to grounding rules Wire a 120 240 V AC duplex receptacle switched 1 The brass terminal screw A is used to terminate the switched L 1 black insulated conductor This conductor originates at the switched side of a single throw switch or a switching network 2 Tab B must be broken when switching the 120 V AC receptacles 3 The other brass terminal screw C is used to terminate the unswitched L 1 black insulated conductor This conductor originates at the splice point of the source conductor t
71. the CRL these lengths were for planning and may not reflect the actual length needed Measure and cut cables then place 2 cable tags at each end to and from Cable tags are NEVER removed 5 Running and securing RF cable All cables should be installed to allow proper access for repairs and replacement When cables are secured to mast or towers start from the top and work down Avoid bending and do not exceed the maximum pulling loading tension a Cables should be secured by size as follows 1 Outside cables 1 5 8 inches in diameter or less should be secured every 3 feet 2 Outside cables over 1 5 8 inches in diameter should be secured every 5 feet 3 Smaller cables should be secured at intervals of 18 inches 4 Inside cables are secure as signal cable but do not use a Chicago power tie b Pull cables directly from the spools by placing the spool on a cable stand Ensure all cables are identified and always have a spool attendant to prevent the cable from tangling and causing undue stress on the cable c Avoid pulling more than 100 feet of cable at one time If pulling more than 100 feet cannot be avoided station a person at least every 100 feet to help route the cable d Cables must not be subjected to unnecessary tension or excessive heat e Do not bundle cables tightly 6 Identify RF connectors There are many types and applications of RF connectors always install the connectors designed for the type of cable b
72. the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 5995 208 10 12 August 2008 3 127 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE INSTALLATION OF CABLE WIRE SYSTEMS 113 588 7012 Conditions Given telephone cable CX 1230 CX 4566 CX 13295 WD 1 TT or WF 16 U a cable team tools equipment TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 5805 201 12 and TM 11 5995 208 10 Standards Supervised the procedures for installing a cable system Performance Steps 1 Spot check the pre installation checks on the telephone cable and wire 2 Coordinate the installation of the surface cable and wire 3 Verify that the installation of the aerial telephone cable or wire road crossing was to standard in accordance with TC 24 20 4 Inspect the installed buried telephone cable or wire crossing 5 Perform operational test Refer to TC 24 20 6 Ensure that communications were established Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Spot checked the pre installation checks on the telephone cable and wire 2 Coordinated the installation of the surface cable and wire 3 Verified that the installation of the aerial telephone cable or wire road crossing was to standard in accordance with TC 24 20 4 Inspected the installed buried telephone cable crossing 5 Performed operational test 6 Ensured that communications were established Evaluation Guidance Score the So
73. the screw 2 Conductor insulation cannot be under the head of the screw 3 The conductor must wrap CLOCKWISE around the screw in the direction the screw tightens between 270 and 360 degrees 4 The bare conductor must stay hidden under the head of the screw 5 Pigtails are the end of the conductor and cannot stick out from under the head of the screw f Wire a single pole single throw toggle switch 1 Only hot conductors are wired to switches 2 One side of the switch is connected to the source A and the other side is connected to the device B 3 The neutral conductor is never connected to switches It is routed from the distribution panel neutral buss directly to the device through the conduit 4 The ground conductor is usually not connected to switches except in special cases g Wire a double throw switch 1 The source A hot L 1 is connected to the switch B with a black colored conductor 2 The device D is connected to the L 1 side of the switch C with a hot L 1 black colored conductor 3 The source E hot L 2 is connected to the L 2 hot side of the switch F with a black colored conductor temporarily marked L 2 4 The L 2 hot side of the device H is connected to the L 2 hot side of the switch G with a black colored conductor temporarily marked L 2 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 5 The neutral conductor is connected to the designated neutral buss bar position
74. tool steady and close the handle unit until the ratchet releases and handles open Remove the crimped connector from the tool Gauge the crimped connection Perform visual inspection of connections Correct improper connections Repeat performance steps 1a through 1h to splice remaining conductors and or pairs Wrap conductor with muslin Wrap splice with two half lapped layers of polyethylene tape Secure splice with paper tape 2 Perform a bridge splice Note The first bank of a bridge splice is always started from the Y side of the splice The starting point is measured 1 3 inch of the splice opening and measured from the sheath butt Splice the cable in banks leaving a 1 4 inch space between each bank a b c d e Prepare splice opening Repeat performance steps 1a through 1b see above Insert the tip conductor from the main cable into the wire support below the guide pin Insert the tip conductor from the bridge cable into the wire support above the guide pin Repeat performance steps 1e through 1n see above 3 Perform a butt splice Note Never put more than one conductor at one time when clear capping This could cause shorts in a working cable system a Identify method of splicing 1 Straight method 2 Loop method b Select two pair in the top cable and two pair in the bottom cable ao al 12 Augu Separate each pair Position the hand tool on the splice
75. type of equipment c Measuring 1 Measure from the baseline and mark the mounting holes from center to center at each end of the lineup 2 Snap a chalk line between these points 3 Determine the distance between each mounting hole and mark each hole along the chalk line Always measure center to center of the holes to be drilled d Check the accuracy before drilling by drawing lines through the center points of each hole The lines should extend a minimum of 3 inches beyond the center point of the hole 2 Drill holes in masonry or concrete a Holes in masonry or concrete shall be deep enough to permit the shields or anchors to be fully inserted in the hole Where plaster covers the surface the hole shall be deep enough to permit the shield or anchor to be installed flush with the concrete not the plaster b Drilling is a two person operation with the operator concentrating on drilling while the assistant helps to keep the drill perpendicular to the surface and monitors safety c The size and type of anchor determines the diameter of the hole d Tape can be wrapped around the shank of the drill bit to serve as a depth guide e When drilling hollow tile limit the pressure to prevent breaking the tile f Anchor spacing requirements have been established by the manufacturers 3 Install various types of anchors a Self drilling expansion shield 1 Insert the correct size chuck into the impact drill so the anchor shield can b
76. using 3 16 inch characters when designation card holders are not furnished 1 Label the inner panel for equipment bay designations a Label with the room number if the distribution panel is not located in the same room as the bay or equipment b Label with the bay number of the bay or cabinet c Label with the equipment power strips using an abbreviated term make annotations on the site drawings if needed d Label with the common receptacle outlets provided at the front and inside of each bay Use an abbreviated term 2 Label AC circuit designations for common house commercial wiring a Label using the room number the circuit supplies b Label using the type of device or equipment such as lights receptacles or bay number 3 Use the designation card holders when available labeling the equipment circuit designations on the individual cards provided Pal 12 August 2008 3 15 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 4 Identify AC safety a General safety 1 It takes very little current to kill as little as 100 milliamperes for two seconds can be deadly 2 The path the current takes through your body will determine the extent of the injuries b AC safety practices 1 Avoid putting your heart in the path of current flow put one hand in your pocket 2 Always wear approved rubber soled boots and use insulated tools 3 Never work on energized circuits 4 Turn off the power remove fuses turn off circuit
77. 1 Selected site for antenna installation Inventoried equipment Installed base for antenna Installed anchors Assembled mast section Installed HF antenna curtains N O Oo A W N Installed down lead guys Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 12 August 2008 4 13 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual 4 14 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG REMOVE SPIRA CONE HIGH FREQUENCY HF ANTENNA 113 596 1083 Conditions Given spira cone HF antenna installed tools and equipment and safety equipment Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Supervision and assistance are provided as required Standards Removed the spira cone HF antenna and removed the mast antenna curtains and down lead guys Performance Steps WARNING The supervisor will brief Soldiers on climbing procedure and being watchful of falling objects 1 Remove down lead guys 2 Lower HF antenna curtains 3 Remove anchors 4 Disassemble mast section Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Removed down lead guys 2 Lowered HF
78. 1 25L13 SM TG INSPECT INSTALLATION OF LOCAL AREA NETWORK WIDE AREA NETWORK LAN WAN SUBSTATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 113 632 7002 Conditions Given an installed LAN WAN Substation Distribution System with D 814 impact tool with 110 blade RJ 45 crimp tool RJ 45 connectors work area outlet connector with RJ 45 jack jacket stripper splice scissors snips tape measure feet metric small flat tip screwdriver and engineering drawings Standards Inspected the installed system inspected the 4 pair CAT 5 UTP cable to ensure it was terminated using appropriate configurations and inspected all cabling to ensure it passed the test requirements Performance Steps 1 Inspect pre installation procedures a Ensure all hazards are identified and removed b Check for correct cable support method c Check tying of loose cables d Check for correct installation method for associated hardware shoes sheaves supports winch and other needed equipment e Check for use of safety equipment such as perimeters cones reels and sheave blocks f Check for use of rolling hitch knot for raising and lowering heavy backbone cable g Check for cable test and ensure results are annotated correctly 2 Inspect installation procedures a Check for routing of cable IAW EIP and cable route maps b Check for installation of tip cable on MDF using distribution rings c Check for cable test and ensure results are annotated correctly 3 Inspect cable t
79. 1 August 1990 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Telephone Set TA 838 TT NSN 5805 00 124 8678 EIC HJH and TA 838A TT 5805 01 125 5976 EIC HOR 25 January 1985 Operator s and Organization Maintenance Manual for Restorer Pulse Form TD 1219 G NSN 5820 01 145 4939 5 March 1985 Operator s Organization Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Test Set Telephone TS 3647 G NSN 6625 01 145 2463 16 September 1985 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC NSN 5820 01 145 2462 14 January 1985 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Multiplexer Combiner TD 1234 P TTC NSN 5820 01 145 2458 EIC HCQ 14 January 1985 Combined Operation and Maintenance Instructions Operator and Organizational Levels Digital Non Secure Voice Terminal TA 954 TT Part No 23400 502 NSN 5805 01 159 9691 15 December 1983 12 August 2008 TM 11 5805 783 13 amp P TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P TM 11 5810 329 10 TM 11 5810 365 10 TM 11 5820 1022 13 1 TM 11 5820 1023 13 1 TM 11 5820 864 12 1 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 TM 11 5820 931 12 1 TM 11 5820 934 13 1 1 TM 11 5825 291 13 TM 11 5995 208 10 TM 11 6020 200 10 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Line Termination Unit CV 4180 V 1 T NSN 5895 01 339 1112 CV 4180 V 2 T 8
80. 11 25L13 SM TG Task Number CRITICAL TASKS Training Location Subject Area 3 Multiplexers 113 606 0105 113 606 0106 113 606 1001 113 606 1002 113 606 3090 113 606 3091 Troubleshoot Multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC or Multiplexer Combiner TD 1234 P TTC Troubleshoot Line Termination Unit LTU CV 4180 Install Multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC or Multiplexer Combiner TD 1234 P TTC Install Line Termination Unit LTU CV 4180 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC or Multiplexer Combiner TD 1234 P TTC Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Line Termination Unit LTU CV 4180 Subject Area 4 Telephone Sets 113 600 1001 113 628 1001 113 600 0011 113 600 1012 113 600 1016 113 600 1017 Install Secure Digital Telephone STU III STE Install Voice Over Internet Protocol VoIP Telephone Troubleshoot KY 68 Install Telephone Set TA 312 PT Install Digital Nonsecure Voice Terminal DNVT Install Telephone Set TA 838 TT 113 600 1022 Install KY 68 113 600 3017 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Telephone Set TA 312 PT 113 600 3020 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Telephone Set TA 838 TT Subject Area 5 Telephone Maintenance Truck 113 588 0007 Perform Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS UNIT AN 1 3 on Telephone Maintenance Truck 113 588 2007 Operate Telephone Maintenance Truck UNIT SA 1 3 Subject Area 6 LAN WAN Substation 113 583 1001
81. 13 SM TG TROUBLESHOOT CX 11230A G CABLE SYSTEM 113 588 0016 Conditions Given pre installed low speed cable driven modem MD 1023 pre installed high speed cable driver modem MD 1024 pre installed COU C 10716 pre installed field cable CX 11230A G a pulse form restorer TD 1218 or TD 1219 telephone test set TS 3647 G battery BA 30 or BA 3030 six each ground rod MX 148 G ground strap stakes HM 1 hammer eye protection and TM 11 5805 703 14 Standards Tested and restored the cable system Performance Steps Refer to TM 11 5805 703 14 for all performance steps 1 Ground the TS 3647 G 2 Prepare the TS 3647 G a Install batteries b Check batteries 3 Connect test set to the cable system at the TD 1218 or TD 1219 pulse form restorer 4 Perform orderwire operation 5 Perform test procedures a Locate fault b Repair fault 6 Retest the cable system 7 Secure test set 8 Restore the cable system Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Grounded the TS 3647 G 2 Prepared the TS 3647 G oO Connected test set to the cable system at the TD 1218 or TD 1219 pulse form restorer Performed orderwire operation Performed test procedures Retested the cable system Secured test set n o N O Oo A Restored the cable system Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is
82. 18 NAVIGATION 113 610 7005 Implement Land Navigation Skills Using Global Positioning Systems 3 177 Subject Area 19 MOBILE SUBSCRIBER EQUIPMENT 113 611 6006 Lead Restoration of Transmission Link Within a Network ceceeeteteeeees 3 179 113 593 1040 Establish Site Layout for Transmission Systems cccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeaes 3 180 Chapter 4 DUTY POSITION TASKS e aap aa a aaa a aaa a ea aaa aa ea OEE aa 4 1 Subject Area 20 ANTENNA INSTALLATION 113 588 1086 Install Pressurized Cable System ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeees 4 1 113 596 1024 Install Parabolic Antenna cccccccceceeeeeeeecneeceeeeeeeeeeenaeceeeeeeeseeeencaeseeeeeeeseeseaneeeees 4 4 113 596 1027 Install AB 216 U TOVE e cece eee ee acces a e a E a aatan 4 6 113 596 1040 Install Pressurized Transmission Lines cccccceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseceeeaaeeeeeeeeeseesnnaees 4 9 113 596 1080 Install Self Support Tower ccccecceceeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeteeecaaeeeeeeeeeseseeaeeeeeeeeeteeneees 4 10 113 596 1081 Remove Self Support Towel c ccccceceeeeeeceeceeceeeceeeseceneeeeeeeeeeeeseccicaeeeeeeeeetenes 4 12 113 596 1082 Install Spira Cone High Frequency HF Antenna ccceeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeeenteeeeeeaes 4 13 113 596 1083 Remove Spira Cone High Frequency HF Antenna cceeceeeeeesteeeeeeseeeeeeenaes 4 15 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG 113 596 1084 Remove
83. 4 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Maintain antenna CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before any work is performed on the antenna a Check for loose or broken elements b Check for defective insulators 1 Cracked 2 Chipped 12 August 2008 4 27 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 Broken c Check connections for corrosion d Check antenna for proper tension e Check down lead for proper tension f Check dissipation line 1 Proper tension 2 Proper grounding 3 Proper horn gap g Test for impedance 1 Input 2 Terminating Note Reconnect the radio equipment h Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 4 Inspect ground obstruction marker WARNING Do NOT damage the load contact relay when the relay contacts are cleaned Inspect obstruction lamps Check all interconnecting cables and connectors for cracks and breaks Check control assembly Clean obstruction components Check electron tube Adjust timer beacon as required g Lubricate shaft bearing and cam 4DAn0TM 5 Fabricate harness 3 wire antenna a Cut a section of 2 2 meters to a length of 7 feet b Bend one end into an 8 inch oval loop c Insert a 3 16 inch thimble into loop d Tightly fit strand around thimble and secure it with seizing wire e Unravel 2 2 meter strands close to thimble end and straighten them f Select first wire of the serve and dress othe
84. 5 209 14 TM 11 5995 208 10 TM 11 5805 701 12 TM 11 5805 702 12 TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 and TM 11 6110 243 14P Standards Installed cable or wire correctly Performance Steps 1 Install reel unit RL 31 for ground or flatbed use Refer to TM 11 3895 202 13 2 Install cable or wire on surface Refer to TC 24 20 3 Install cable or wire aerial a Install cable or wire on poles or trees Refer to TC 24 20 b Install terminal A frame s Refer to TC 24 20 1 Install intermediate A frame s Refer to TC 24 20 c Install aerial telephone cable road crossing Refer to TC 24 20 4 Bury cable or wire when appropriate Refer to TC 24 20 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Installed reel unit RL 31 for ground or flatbed use 2 Installed cable or wire on surface 3 Installed cable or wire aerial 4 Buried cable or wire when appropriate Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 3895 209 14 TM 11 5805 201 12 TM 11 5805 702 12 TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 TM 11 5995 208 10 TM 11 6110 201 12P TM 11 6110 243 14P 3 20 12 August 2008 ST
85. 50A and 90A for float applications or horizontally 50A 90A and 100A Horizontal configurations are preferred d A minimum of 36 inches of aisle space must be maintained adjacent to the battery bank e When the application voltage requires a dummy cell will replace a live cell in an Absolyte module DC wiring must use the gauge and type of wire called for in the EIP There should NOT be more than one splice per circuit on the hot side and NO splices on the return g Battery performance is based on the output at the battery therefore the shortest connection to the equipment will result in maximum performance lowest voltage drop al 10 Install connectors a The crimp connector is used on multistranded cable only 1 Mark the cable and remove the correct amount of insulation 2 The insulation should be flush against the connector with 1 8 inch of bare conductor visible on the other side 3 Crimp the connector onto the cable b The set screw connector can be used on stranded or solid conductor cable Cable preparation is the same as the crimp connector 11 Identify safety precautions a The installation of batteries will be constantly supervised and the supervisor will not physically participate in the installation b A minimum of three people will be present while work is being performed on batteries c A safety briefing will be given each day before work starts Personnel must be aware of how to react to an accident in
86. 595 01 339 1113 CV 4180 5895 01 361 3887 CV 4180 V 4 T 5895 01 361 3888 CV 4180A V 1 T 5895 01 392 0050 CV 4180A 2 T 5895 01 392 0045 CV 4180A V 3 T 5895 01 392 0046 15 November 1992 O Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for General Purpose Tape Reader KOI 18 NSN 7025 01 026 9620 Electronic Transfer Device KYK 13 NSN 5810 01 026 9616 Net Control Device KYX 15 15A NSN 5895 01 026 9619 NSN 5810 01 095 1312 31 May 1989 O Operator s Manual for Digital Subscriber Voice Terminal TSEC KY 68 NSN 5810 01 082 8404 3 June 1996 O Operator s Manual for Trunk Encryption Devices KG 94A NSN 5810 01 213 8200 KG 194A NSN 5810 01 283 1394 and Interface Adapter Unit NSN 5810 01 280 4746 3 January 1994 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Radio Access Unit AN TRC 191A V 1 NSN 5820 01 301 2542 EIC HEG and Radio Access Unit AN TRC 191A V 2 5820 01 326 071 1 EIC HEP MSE 1 February 1996 Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Line of Sight Multichannel Radio Terminal AN TRC 190 V 1 NSN 5820 01 247 0981 EIC HHC AN TRC 190A V 1 5895 01 310 2538 EIC HEF AN TRC 190 V 2 5820 01 247 0979 EIC HHD AN TRC 190A V 2 5895 01 309 4649 EIC HEL AN TRC 190 V 3 5820 01 247 0982 EIC HHE AN TRC 190A V 3 5895 01 310 2543 EIC HEH AN TRC 190 V 4 5820 01 247 0980 EIC HHF AN TRC 190A V 4 5895 01 309 4651 EIC HEM 1 March 198
87. 7 COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY SUPERVISE THE CONFIGURATION OF AN AIS TO OPERATE ON A NETWORK 113 580 7128 Conditions Given an Automated Information System AIS trained Soldier Windows Operating System twisted pair cable and configuration information Standards Configured the AIS to properly operate on network as indicated by green light on NIC indicator Performance Steps 1 Ensure Soldier powers on AIS Ensure Soldier clicks on network neighborhood or network places Ensure Soldier selects properties Ensure Soldier selects transmission control protocol TCP Internet protocol IP Ensure Soldier appropriately configures all tabs Ensure Soldier saves configurations N O oO FB W N Ensure Soldier reboots AlS Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Ensured Soldier powered on AIS Ensured Soldier clicked on network neighborhood or network places Ensured Soldier selected properties Ensured Soldier selected TCP IP Ensured Soldier added appropriate configurations on all tabs Ensured Soldier saved configurations N O oO FB W N Ensured Soldier rebooted AIS References Required Related ISBN 0072122269 3 176 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 18 NAVIGATION IMPLEMENT LAND NAVIGATION SKILLS USING GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEMS 113 610 7005 Conditions Given a requirement an operational global positioning system GPS receiver compati
88. 9 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Radio Repeater Set AN TRC 174 NSN 5820 01 161 9420 Vol I 1 January 1989 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Radio Terminal Set AN TRC 173 NSN 5820 01 161 9422 1 January 1989 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Radio Repeater Set AN TRC 138A NSN 5820 01 161 9419 Vol I 1 January 1989 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Radio Terminal Set AN TRC 175 NSN 5820 01 161 9421 1 January 1989 Combined Operation and Maintenance Instructions Chapters One through Six Organizational and Intermediate Radio Terminal Set AN TRC 170 V 2 Part Number 951100 4 NSN 5820 01 148 3977 1 August 1985 Operations and Maintenance Manual for Satellite Signals Navigation Sets AN PSN 11 NSN 5825 01 374 6643 and AN PSN 11 V 1 5825 01 395 3513 1 April 2001 Operator s Manual for Cable Assembly Special Purpose Electrical CX 11230 G 1 4 Mile NSN 5995 00 133 9126 CX 11230 G 100 Foot 5995 00 133 9127 CX 11230A G 1320 Foot 5995 01 121 6623 CX 11230A G 100 Foot 5995 01 125 6781 and CX 10734 G 5995 00 133 9125 7 November 1983 Operator s Manual for Fiber Optic Cable Assemblies CX 13295 G 300M NSN 6020 01 220 5435 and CX 13295 G 1000M 6020 01 208 1147 15 March 1993 References 3 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TM 11 6020 200 238 amp P Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Fiber Optic Cable Assemblies CX 13295 G 300
89. AB 216 U TOWED ecccccceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeseeneeeeeeaes 4 16 113 596 1086 Remove Broadband Dipole High Frequency HF Antenna 4 18 113 596 3010 Maintain Rotatable Log Periodic Antenna cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeetieeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeenaes 4 19 113 596 3011 Maintain Delta Matched Doublet Antenna cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenieeeeeeenaeeeenenaes 4 22 113 596 3012 Maintain Fixed Log Periodic Antenna c ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenieeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeneaes 4 24 113 596 3014 Maintain Rhombic Antenna cc eceeccceeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeenaeeeeseaas 4 27 113 596 3015 Maintain Parabolic Antenna c ee ceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeedeeeeeeeneeeeeeaas 4 30 113 596 3016 Maintain Yagi Antenna eee cece eeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeeenaeeeseeieeeeeeaes 4 32 113 596 3018 Maintain AB 216 U TOWED ccccceceseceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeesaeeceeeeseeeesesaeeeseeeeeas 4 34 113 596 3021 Maintain Self Support TOWe cccccceceeeeeeeenee cece eeeeseeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeesecnuaeeeeeereeteees 4 36 113 596 3047 Maintain Spira Cone High Frequency HF Antenna 0 eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeenaes 4 38 113 596 3049 Maintain Broadband Dipole High Frequency HF Antenna 4 40 113 596 4005 Maintain Coaxial Cable for Antenna Systems ccc ce ceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaes 4 44 113 596 4008 Maintain Pressurization EQ
90. ABLE ASSEMBLY FOCA CX 13295 G 113 632 9012 Conditions Given a cable team with a section of fiber optic cable splicer s hand tools cleaving tools polishing adapter reagent alcohol microscope mechanical splice workstation equipment Norland optical adhesive Fiberlok 2501assembly tool fiber optic fusion splicer safety glasses and manufacture instructional manuals Standards Inspected the fiber optic cable for proper operation after splicing as indicated by manufacture instructional manuals and verified communications were restored Performance Steps 1 Inspect splicing technique used a Norland UVC optical splice b AMP optimate mechanical fiber optic splice c Fusion splicer d Fiberlok optical splice 2 Inspect set up of workstation and equipment according to splicing technique 3 Test operation of fiber cable for correct tolerance and operation 4 Check for reestablishment of communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected splicing techniques a Norland UVC optical splice b AMP optimate mechanical fiber optic splice c Fusion splicer d Fiberlok optical splice 2 Inspected set up of workstation and equipment according to splicing technique 3 Tested fiber optic cable for correct tolerance and operation 4 Checked for reestablishment of communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO is all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the
91. August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN RHOMBIC ANTENNA 113 596 3014 Conditions Given rhombic antenna installed multimeter safety equipment coffin hoist tool equipment TE 21 tool equipment TE 87 engineers transit block and tackle kit open end wrenches screwdriver set pliers adjustable wrench level tape measure DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 FM 11 487 25 and the antenna safety manual Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions You will work under the supervision of a crew chief Assistance is provided as required Standards Corrected faults and completed DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Inspect tower safety devices a Check climbing belts for cuts frays and cracks b Check climbing sleeve bearing c Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension 2 Maintain guyed supported tower CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before work is performed on the tower Check tower for loose hardware Check tower for rust Inspect tower footing for loose hardware Check to ensure that tower is plumb tension guys as required Check tower ground for corrosion and loose hardware Dnanqgad Note Reconnect radio equipment f Complete and submit DA Form 240
92. August 2008 3 91 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 To level high spots cut out floor covering or the floor itself The maximum level deviation allowable between two floor angles is an 1 8 inch and the entire length of a row cannot exceed a 3 8 inch deviation from level c Frame verticals uprights 1 After installing the floor angles install the vertical angles at each end 2 Secure the end verticals with nuts and bolts to the top angle 3 Install all the remaining intermediate verticals 4 Check the horizontal and vertical planes with a plumb line and a level before tightening the assembly 5 Install the permanent bracing before removing the temporary bracing d Continue frame installation After the floor angels and verticals have been assembled continue as follows 1 Before mounting a ground buss bar to the frame the paint must be removed at the point of contact of each vertical bonding and a thin coating of petroleum jelly applied to the contact surface Secure the ground buss bar at each vertical upright 2 The jumper ring bars are fastened in place at the bottom the fifth and the top of the frame using jumper rings on each vertical Ensure that the offset end of each jumper ring bar is toward the growing end of the frame Jumper rings are installed on each shelf and each vertical 3 Install the terminal block mounting bars on the front of the transverse arms Make certain that the offset end of eac
93. CAT 5 UTP cable Terminated cable in work area Terminated cable in telecommunications closet Fabricated a CAT 5 UTP patch cord if required Tested cable for faults SN n Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related AR 380 5 Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 105 STP 11 2 5L13 SM TG OPERATE HAND AND POWER TOOLS 113 583 2001 Conditions Given reciprocating saw band saw rotary hammer Greenlee hydraulic punch driver manufactures operating instructions and notes Standards Operated the most common power tools used in C E installation tasks Performance Steps 1 Observe safety rules while operating power tools a b C d you TEQ d 2 Ope a b 40 AQ 3 Ope a b c 4 Ope a b c d e Rr OER 3 106 Always wear safety goggles Always wear hearing protection when operating power tools KEEP HANDS AWAY from the work area Be aware of your surroundings and position the tools electrical cord so that it is not a tripping hazard and is clear of the work area Do not wrap the cord around your arm or wrist Wear a dust mask or respirator while sawing grinding sanding or drilling Do
94. Check climbing sleeve bearing c Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension e Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Maintain guyed supported tower CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before work is performed on the tower Check tower for loose hardware Check tower for rust Inspect tower footing for loose hardware Check to ensure that tower is plumb tension guys as required Check tower ground for corrosion and loose hardware D9na0q0 08 Note Reconnect radio equipment f Complete and submit DA 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Maintain antenna CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before any work is performed on the antenna a Check antenna for loose hardware b Check for cracked chipped or broken insulator c Check elements for signs of deterioration clean as required 4 22 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps d Readjust antenna height and antenna curtain length e Readjust antenna down lead spacing and down lead length Note Reconnect radio equipment f Perform VSWR test g Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 4 Inspect ground obstruction marker WARNING Do NOT damage the load contact relay when the relay contacts are cleaned
95. Corner clamps e f g 1 These clamps are used to end a run make turns form T intersections and for horizontal offsets 2 The maximum gap between the rack and the end of the stringer is 1 8 inch Corner braces These are used for bracing and when cables require a gradual turn at intersections Edge clamps These 90 and 45 degree edge clamps are used for vertical offsets to change vertical direction inside and outside bends 1 Cable racks that form a 90 degree vertical turn with a turn radius of 6 inches or less can be joined by two sets of 90 degree edge clamps 2 To form a 90 degree vertical turn with a turn radius of more than 6 inches four sets of 45 degree edge clamps can be used to join the cable rack Hanger clips Used to secure threaded rod to the cable rack stringer The J bolt Used to mount rack to framing bar or channel Rack feet Used to attach rack ends to walls or the floor 4 Identify the types of support a 3 86 Overhead cable rack support direct and indirect mounting 1 Overhead support uses the permanent building structural members or securing devices installed at the time the cable rack was installed The site must be laid out and marked on the floor where the equipment will be installed 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 2 Overhead indirect support Spacing often makes it impractical to support cable racks with threaded rods attached directly to
96. Group Modem Cable Length rotary switch is set to position 5 loopback d Check that the power cable connectivity and the corresponding jumper positions have been set on TB1 located on backside of front panel 4 Conduct troubleshooting procedures Refer to TM 11 5805 783 13 amp P 5 Identify malfunctions 6 Correct malfunctions a Check that the power cable connectivity and the corresponding jumper positions have been set on TB1 located on backside of front panel 7 Reestablish communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified that the trouble existed Verified that the LTU had power Conducted pre troubleshooting checks Conducted Troubleshooting procedures Identified malfunctions Corrected malfunctions N O Oo A W N Reestablished communications 3 60 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5805 783 13 amp P 12 August 2008 3 61 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL MULTIPLEXER TD 1233 P TTC OR MULTIPLEXER COMBINER TD 1234 P TTC 113 606 1001 Conditions Given multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC and multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC cable CX 11230A U power
97. IAL FIBER OPTIC TERMINATORS CONNECTORS 113 632 4001 Conditions Given a section of fiber optic cable connectors straight tip ST subminiature version A SMA biconical hot melt splicer s hand tools cleaving tools polishing adapter lapping film microscope curing oven safety glasses ANSI TIA EIA 568B 569A cabling standard and manufacture s manual Note Let Soldier know that assistance is available WARNING Be very careful when disposing of fiber ends The fiber creates slivers that can cause injury Always wear safety glasses when working with optical fibers CAUTION Do not touch bare fibers with fingers as oil from skin can weaken the fiber by making it brittle Standards Terminated the fiber optic connector to the fiber optic cable as indicated by manufacture s manuals and retained a reading level of no more than 1 decibel dB loss per connector Performance Steps 1 Inventory and clean connector parts a Inspect and inventory connector package b Clean connector with a dry lint free cloth Prepare cable and fiber a Slip the strain relief boot tube onto the buffered fiber b Strip buffer to specified length as per connector c Clean fiber with lint free cloth and alcohol Prepare epoxy a Mix the two components until epoxy is a uniform blue color b Load the syringe with epoxy c Attach the epoxy dispensing tip Crimp connectors a Insert epoxy into the connector b Apply e
98. Inspect obstruction lamps Check all interconnecting cables and connectors for cracks and breaks Check control assembly Clean obstruction components Check electron tube Adjust timer beacon as required Lubricate shaft bearing and cam Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 s Q 07DQA0q0Q0 08 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected tower safety devices 2 Maintain guyed supported tower 3 Maintained antenna 4 Inspected ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 FM 11 487 11 Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 4 23 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN FIXED LOG PERIODIC ANTENNA 113 596 3012 Conditions Given rotatable log periodic antenna installed VSWR testing equipment multimeter safety equipment tool kit TK 115 G tool equipment RE 33 block and tackle engineers transit open end wrenches DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 and the antenna safety manual Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards
99. M NSN 6020 01 220 5435 and CX 13295 G 100M 6020 01 208 1147 15 March 1993 TM 11 6110 243 14P Operator s Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists including Depot Maintenance Repair parts and Special Tools for Distribution Boxes J 2317 U NSN 6110 00 937 4964 8 September 1976 TM 11 6625 3227 138 amp P Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Optical Communications Test Set TS 4117 G NSN 6625 01 189 8155 15 May 1994 TM 11 6625 3292 12 General Support Maintenance Manual for Telephone Cable Test Set AN GTM 12 NSN 6625 01 304 6220 27 February 1995 TM 9 2320 269 10 Operator s Manual for Truck Telephone Maintenance Utility C S 36 000 GVW 6x4 w Winch W E M876 NSN 2320 00 000 01 14 4 April 1984 TM 9 243 Use and Care of Hand Tools and Measuring Tools 12 December 1983 Training Circulars TC 24 20 Tactical Wire and Cable Techniques 3 October 1988 RELATED PUBLICATIONS Related publications are sources of additional information They are not required in order to understand this publication Army Regulations AR 25 55 The Department of the Army Freedom of Information Act Program 1 November 1997 AR 380 40 O Policy for Safeguarding and Controlling Communications Security COMSEC Material U 30 June 2000 Department of Army Pamphlets DA Pam 25 380 2 O Security Procedures for Controlled C
100. M show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5810 365 10 3 116 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 8 CONDUIT INSTALL CONDUIT 113 583 1010 Conditions Given conduit conduit cutting tools reamer round flat file condulets utility boxes couplers conduit connectors mechanical manual or hydraulic bender material and notes Standards Measured bent and installed conduit using approved installation methods as defined in the National Electric Code handbook and the Phase III engineering installation package EIP Performance Steps 1 Identify the purpose of conduit a Conduit is a tubular raceway that protects insulated conductors b Lengths of conduit can be connected to boxes conduit bodies and equipment to form a distribution system 2 Identify types of conduit a Conduit can be made of aluminum polyvinyl chloride PVC plastic copper alloy or steel Steel provides the best grounding and shielding from EMI and is the only conduit used in C E facilities b Rigid Conduit Thick wall 1 Galvanized steel rigid conduit is used in outside plant installation where excessive dampness is present or when the conduit must be embedded in concrete 2 Non galvanized steel rigid conduit is used for general interior work 3 Support is required every 10 feet and within 3 feet of any box cabinet
101. Mbias 5 sett a cestode de tind senan tates tested radi a a See 1 9 EO POCA ACK anian nk he AA nae ae ee ee Se ae Aaa ee a e te eras hares 1 9 Chapter 2 TRAINER S GUIDE a a rae cdtecsiceatedaseceecasansundhaneoneecensasusactsteecesassuatccestiecddasvenscnue 2 1 22s Generalene aeaa lath ashtenehazt sath aa deselect cobs aaa aa eaa 2 1 2 2 Subject Area Codes wecisvindic vista deceeeve ade lee lectern ei aca ed cee ede 2 2 2233 Critical FaSk E STe a a ls a aa aa atte sa aa aa aa tt gtd a e E e aaa 2 3 Chapter 3 MOS SKILL LEVEL TASKS e aera aaa aaa a Ea aeaa ada aa aaa aa a Eaa aeaa 3 1 Skill Level 1 Subject Area 1 NAVIGATE 113 610 2044 Navigate Using the AN PSN 11 aasnssssssssessensnensssesrinnsnsseerrrnnssssrtrnttnnnnnssnntnnnnnneeent 3 1 Subject Area 2 CABLE AND EQUIPMENT 113 588 2002 Perform Cable Marking Procedures ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeees 3 3 113 588 2003 Install Connectors on Copper Cable eccccecccceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeees 3 4 113 588 2004 Perform a Splice on a Plastic Sheath Plastic Insulated Cable ccccccccceceeeeeees 3 9 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited This publication supersedes STP 11 25L13 SM TG dated 15 March 2005 STP 11 25L13 SM TG 113 588 2003 Install Connectors on Copper Cable c ccccccceceeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesnaeees 3 4 113 588 2004 Perform a Splice
102. O 9 Terminated WF 16 from J 1077 to distant end as required by OPORD or SPD 10 Established communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related SPD TM 11 3895 202 13 TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 201 12 TM 11 5805 783 13 amp P UNIT OPORD 3 64 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON MULTIPLEXER TD 1233 P TTC OR MULTIPLEXER COMBINER TD 1234 P TTC 113 606 3090 Conditions Given multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC and multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC flat tip screwdriver dust brush and cleaning rags cleaning solvent Trichlorotrifluoroethane DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Standards Performed ULM completed DA Forms 2404 and 2408 14 and the equipment was operational or evacuated the defective equipment to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps WARNING Trichlorotrifluoroethane fumes can cause severe irritation or injury Provide ventilation whenever it is used 1 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Perform routine checks on the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC 3 Power on 4 Perform BITE test 5 Complete DA Forms 2404 and 2408 14 Refer to DA
103. Of KY 68 0 cececceeeecee cece ee teeeceeeeeeeeeseseeecaeaeeeeeereeteees 3 162 Subject Area 15 MULTIPLEXER INSPECTION 113 606 7029 Inspect Installation of Multiplexers 0 cece ceceeecee cece ee eeeeeeee cece settee teeeeieaeeeeeeeeeteees 3 163 113 606 7030 Inspect Troubleshooting of Multiplexers cccccccceeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 3 164 113 606 7031 Inspect Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Multiplexers eeeeeeeeeeeteteeee 3 165 Subject Area 16 LAN WAN SUBSTATION INSPECTION 113 613 4003 Verify Engineering Installation Package EIP 0 eeceeeseeeeeeeeteteeeeeeteeeeeenaes 3 166 113 632 7002 Inspect Installation of Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN Substation Distribution System eee ceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeeeeeaes 3 168 113 632 9007 Inspect Installation of Commercial Fiber Optic Cable Terminators Connectors 3 170 113 632 9010 Inspect Repair of Fiber Optic Cable Assembly FOCA CX 13295 V G 3 172 113 632 9011 Inspect Splicing of Commercial Fiber Optic Cable ccccccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeee 3 173 113 632 9013 Inspect Troubleshooting of Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN Substation Distribution System eccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteees 3 174 Subject Area 17 COMPUTER TECHNOLOGY 113 580 7128 Supervise the Configuration of an AIS to Operate on a Network 000 3 176 Subject Area
104. P 11 25L13 SM TG RECOVER CABLE WIRE SYSTEM 113 588 2010 Conditions Given reel unit RL 31 can be vehicle mounted tool equipment TE 21 and TE 33 wire or cable pre installed cable or wire reels empty hammer HM 1 shovel gloves eye protection cargo truck M35A2 2 1 2 ton or equivalent team of Soldiers TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 3895 209 14 and TM 11 5995 208 10 Standards Recovered the cable or wire system Performance Steps 1 Disconnect cable from terminal equipment Refer to TC 24 20 2 Lower aerial cable to ground 3 Recover buried field cable Refer to TC 24 20 4 Remove tags ties and stakes from cable or wire system Refer to TC 24 20 5 Recover field cable using reel unit RL 31 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Disconnected cable from terminal equipment 2 Lowered aerial cable to ground 3 Recovered buried field cable 4 Removed tags ties and stakes from cable or wire system 5 Recovered field cable using reel unit RL 31 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 3895 209 14 TM 11 5995 208 10 12 August 2008 3 21 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL COMMERC
105. Paragraph Four 4 0 Appendices a Lists and briefly describes appendices that are required for the project b The appendices are identified alphabetically e Describe appendices used in the EIP 1 Installation steps and instructions a Lists the specific steps to install and or uninstall equipment b The sequence of installation steps and any special instructions that must be followed to keep the facility operational during the installation c Installation steps will refer to drawings as much as possible d If an on site engineer is provided it will be stated within this appendix 2 Sequence of installation a Conducts an inventory of the Bill of Materials BOM and commences installation The floor layout is made IAW the floor plan drawing All overhead work is installed All equipment racks cabinets and frames installed and aligned Install identify and mark equipment in cabinets Prepare cable tags and run and secure cables Butt strip fan and terminate cables at equipment and frame b c d e f g 12 August 2008 3 97 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps h Test and verify cable terminations i Cutover plan coordinated with users and cross connects installed j Operational test conducted QC QA and site clean up touch up conducted k EIP and drawings updated red lined I Installation complete 3 The BOM list will be by alpha National Stock Number NSN and Standard Material List
106. SPLICE 113 588 9008 Conditions Given paper tape cotton tape vinyl tape measuring tape scotch tape electrical tape muslin material polyethylene tape No 5 Transflex tubing tinned copper sleeves No 16 paper clip or test clip lead sleeve if required rosin core solder soldering iron carding brush hammer pliers chipping knife cutting tool slitting tool shears cable stripper splicer s scissors gloves test boards cotton sleeves cable bonding clamp bond wire or textile insulated wire and FM 11 372 1 Note Cables were installed leaving approximately 5 feet on both ends for splicing Supervision and assistance are available Standards Spliced and soldered video cable with no errors Performance Steps Refer to FM 11 372 1 for all performance steps 1 Prepare cables for splice opening a Install temporary supports b Install cable supports c Measure for lead sleeve splice 2 Open cable a Open lead sheathed cable 1 Remove cable sheath slitting required CAUTION Make sure the chipping knife does NOT cut the core wrapping paper or damage the conductors 2 Prepare sheath ends to protect conductors a Rotate cable if required b Butt cable with two paper wrapping and with four paper wrapping c Install temporary bonds 3 Remove layer shields Exposes conductors b Open polyethylene covered cable non isolated 1 Remove cable sheath 2 Remove metal sheath 3 Cut tabs 4
107. STP 11 25L13 SM TG Soldier s Manual and Trainer s Guide MOS 25L CABLE SYSTEMS INSTALLER MAINTAINER SKILL LEVELS 1 2 AND 3 August 2008 DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION Approved for public release distribution is unlimited HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY This publication is available at Army Knowledge Online AKO www us army mil and General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library at http www train army mil SOLDIER TRAINING HEADQUARTERS PUBLICATION DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY No 11 25L13 SM TG Washington DC 12 August 2008 SOLDIER S MANUAL and TRAINER S GUIDE MOS 25L MOS 25L CABLE SYSTEMS INSTALLER MAINTAINER Skill Levels 1 2 and 3 CONTENTS Page PREPAG E E a A cust eesstcupeuedunys wsaeclugeek coneeuse tineees eveetuctaguers chegmmauccaatergens vi Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION a r a aces adie eE E a a E a a deve a a ra Aaaa Ca rap E aAA adaa NEn de 1 1 A Ter Ge eralr enrere e a e o a a r A 1 1 1 2 Training Equipment eeta aae a aeiae aaea icin aar es aae ae aard taasan 1 1 1 3 Battlg Focused Training rrecasn iee a A E E AR 1 4 1 43 Task Summary FOnMMate es catsceccisehiceieaet e a E AA R 1 5 TSn Training EXE CUUR AE A E A ETER 1 6 1 6 Training ASSESSMEN cece ssebeccevedecece cidecchvanadeccebedesec suhdeccbvanceecveuhgecceendeccceernieeectesigecceendis 1 7 1 7 NCO Self Development and the Soldiers Manual ccceceeeeeeeeceeeeteeeeeeeeesnnanees 1 8 1282 TirainiNnG SUP PO
108. Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 FM 11 487 27 12 August 2008 4 37 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN SPIRA CONE HIGH FREQUENCY HF ANTENNA 113 596 3047 Conditions Given spira cone HF antenna tools and equipment carrier rail ground obstruction marker screwdriver set pliers open end wrench knife level tape measure adjustable safety equipment DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 and the antenna safety manual Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Checked the spira cone antenna including base antenna curtains and structure braces for signs of deterioration checked down lead guys and anchors for proper tension and recorded uncorrected faults on DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Inspect tower safety devices a b C Check climbing belts for cuts frays and cracks Check climbing sleeve bearing Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension 2 Inspect guys oaoogog CAUTION The radio equipment
109. Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 153 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON TEST SETS 113 574 9001 Conditions Given a telephone test set flat tip screwdriver DA Form 2404 or computer generated DA Form 5988 E and DA Pam 750 8 Note This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation under all weather conditions it may be performed in an NBC environment Standards Correctly inspected the ULM Performance Steps 1 Inspect ULM on identified test set 2 Complete DA Form 2404 or computer generated DA Form 5988 E Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected ULM on identified test set 2 Inspected completed DA Form 2404 or computer generated DA Form 5988 E Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 5988 E DA Pam 750 8 3 154 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PLAN A TELEPHONE CABLE LINE 113 588 5007 Conditions Given grid map sheets covering the area of operations coordinates of all terminal points protr
110. TG INTERPRET ENGINEERING INSTALLATION PACKAGE EIP 113 583 1007 Conditions Given material and an EIP Standards Interpreted an EIP and successfully converted fractions and decimals Performance Steps 1 Identify the EIP numbering a The first character identifies the major command responsible for preparing the EIP 1 E Europe 2 C continental United States CONUS 3 K Far East b The second character number depicts the calendar year in which the EIP was initiated c The third and fourth characters letters identify the functional element 1 SV Voice 2 TS Satellite 3 SD Data 4 TR Radio 5 SS Secure Voice Army Airfields 6 TI Transmission d The last three characters numbers identify the chronological order of each command s EIP beginning with 001 each calendar year 2 Identify the parts of an EIP a The Cover Page Includes the project title project number organizational data date and distribution statement b The Signature Page Includes the project title project number distribution statement directorate and command name and the signature lines for the project team leader and installing activity c The Disclaimer Page Changes distribution and disposition instructions d Identify the format of the EIP 1 Paragraph One 1 0 General The Project Overview 2 Paragraph Two 2 0 Installation Team Responsibilities 3 Paragraph Three 3 0 Points of Contact POC 4
111. Training evaluations are a critical component of any training assessment Evaluation measures the demonstrated ability of Soldiers commanders leaders battle staffs and units against the Army standard Evaluation of training is integral to standards based training and is the cornerstone of leader training and leader development STPs describe standards that must be met for each Soldier task 1 All training must be evaluated to measure performance levels against the established Army standard The evaluation can be as fundamental as an informal internal evaluation performed by the leader conducting the training Evaluation is conducted specifically to enable the individual undergoing the training to know whether the training standard has been achieved Commanders must establish a 12 August 2008 1 7 STP 11 25L13 SM TG climate that encourages candid and accurate feedback for the purpose of developing leaders and trained Soldiers 2 Evaluation of training is not a test it is not used to find reasons to punish leaders and Soldiers Evaluation tells Soldiers whether or not they achieved the Army standard and therefore assists them in determining the overall effectiveness of their training plans Evaluation produces disciplined Soldiers leaders and units Training without evaluation is a waste of time and resources 3 Leaders use evaluations as an opportunity to coach and mentor Soldiers A key element in developing leaders is immediate p
112. U tower Performance Steps 1 Install safety equipment Note Safety climbing equipment must be installed either with the tower method or with the pole method Refer to antenna safety manual 2 Install tower a b C d e f g h i j k l m C 0n a000 4 6 Identify tower location Connect tower support base plates AB 206 U to foundation timbers Assemble tower sections AB 208 U and AB 207 U Install tower section AB 208 U Connect triangular frame to tower section AB 208 U Locate guy anchors Install guy anchors using one of the following methods 1 Manually 2 Telephone maintenance truck M 876 Assemble davit MX 1215 U Connect davit MX 1215 U to tower top horizontal member Install snatch block and coupler to tower Secure the hook on snatch block using the mouse method Install ground on tower Erect tower section using one of the following methods 1 Manually 2 Vehicle 3 Capstan Connect tower section to existing tower and transfer part as required Erect guys to desired guy level Connect guys to tower Install guy spacers and take up winch on anchors Connect tension guy wire to tower Install antenna support AB 296 G Erect antenna support AB 296 G Connect antenna support AB 296 G 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 Install ground obstruction marker CAUTION Electrical equipment must be handled carefully when movi
113. UNCTION switch to IR 10M Press and release the ADVANCE switch Observe the flashing TEST light and if the test set is powered in the AC or external DC mode the advancing circuit numbers in the display window as the test scans forward A01 A02 A03 etc a 9DAaqaq w Note If the scan halts note the displayed conductor number If the scan advances through B26 and the END light illuminates for approximately 20 seconds skip the remaining steps h Press and release the ADVANCE switch Note Record the defective conductors shown in the display i Repeat steps f through h until the test sequence advances through B26 and the END light illuminates j Set the FUNCTION switch to IR 0 1M and repeat steps f through h Note Conductors that test faulty at the 10M threshold but pass the 0 1M threshold should be examined to determine the cause of low resistance e g moisture and or dirt on the cable hocks and appropriate corrective action taken 5 Perform X TALK test CAUTION To avoid damage to the test set or other equipment ensure that the cable that you intend to test is disconnected from any load power source or wiring Never use the AN GTM 12 to test a cable that is connected to anything other than an approved shorting block Note The setup for X TALK is the same as for IR except the FUNCTION switch position a Connect adapter cable W100 to connector J100 b Connect the cable to be tested to the U 185B G
114. Wire Systems Supervise Installation of Cable Wire Systems Supervise Splicing of Commercial Fiber Optic Cable Supervise Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Test Sets Supervise Installation of Multiplexers Supervise Troubleshooting of Multiplexers Supervise Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Multiplexers Subject Area 10 Telephone Sets Supervision 113 600 7042 113 600 7043 Supervise Installation of KY 68 Supervise Troubleshooting of KY 68 Subject Area 11 LAN WAN Substation Supervision 113 588 7003 Supervise Installation of Local Area Network Wide Area Network UNIT SA 2 3 LAN WAN Substation Distribution System 113 588 7007 Supervise Troubleshooting of Local Area Network Wide Area UNIT SA 2 3 Network LAN WAN Substation Distribution System Skill Level 3 Subject Area 12 Cable and Equipment Inspection 113 588 7001 Inspect Installation of AC DC Power Source for Communications BNCOC AN 3 113 588 7002 113 588 7008 113 588 7009 113 588 7011 113 632 9009 113 632 9012 113 574 9001 113 588 5007 113 588 6001 12 August 2008 Equipment BNCOC AN BNCOC SA BNCOC SA BNCOC SA BNCOC SA BNCOC SA Supervise Basic Safety in Cable Systems Installation Inspect Installation of Cable Wire Systems Inspect Recovery of Cable Wire Systems Inspect Troubleshooting of Cable Wire Systems Inspect Operation of Fiber Optic Cable Test Set Inspect Splicing of Fiber Optic Cable Assembly FOCA CX 13295 G Inspect Unit Leve
115. Y 68 system 3 Direct the corrective actions of fault s on the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Directed the troubleshooting of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system 2 Directed the identification of fault s on the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system 3 Directed the corrective actions of fault s on the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5810 329 10 TM 11 5820 864 12 1 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 TM 11 5820 931 12 1 3 162 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 15 MULTIPLEXER INSPECTION INSPECT INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLEXERS 113 606 7029 Conditions Given multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC field cable CX 11230 G telephone set TA 341 TT ground rod MX 148 G ground strap power supply cord system diagram COU C 10716 flat tip screwdriver TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Note This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation under all weather conditions it may be performed in an NBC environment Standards Inspected the installation of the TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC Performance Steps 1 Inspect the programming of the circuit card
116. able Identified the types of RF cable Identified the general installation procedures for RF cable Ran and secured RF cable Identified RF connectors Assembled an RF connector Tested and fabricated RF cables Inspected RF cables and assemblies Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals MIL STD 188 124B 3 3 8 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM A SPLICE ON A PLASTIC SHEATH PLASTIC INSULATED CABLE 113 588 2004 Conditions Given a pre installed cable system a VS 3 hand tool picabonds muslin B polyethylene tape paper taper and Manufacture s Manual Standards Spliced the cable and restored communications Performance Steps 1 Make cable splice a b c 533 _ x SQ oa Identify one cable pair to splice from first cable using color code Identify the corresponding cable pair to splice from second cable using color code Insert the tip conductor of the first cable completely into wire support leaving slack in the conductor Repeat the above procedure for the tip conductor from the second cable Insert a connector into the VS 3 hand tool Hold
117. able System loss test set power meter optical fault finder optical TDR or equivalent test sets and connectors Standards Identified and repaired faults and established communications Performance Steps 1 Ensure there is no equipment problem before checking fiber cable 2 Conduct a visual inspection of cable a Inspect for breaks b Check for kinks c Check for loose connections 3 Replace faulty connectors as needed 4 Test cable a Conduct continuity test using loss test set power meter or equivalent b Test for faults and excess attenuation using optical fault finder or equivalent c Test for reflection and fiber defects using optical TDR or equivalent d Test for dB kilometer km using optical TDR or equivalent e Identify connector loss splice loss using optical TDR or equivalent Isolate fault Repair fiber optic cable Test cable Oo N OQ WO Restore service Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Ensured there is no equipment problem before checking fiber cable Conducted a visual inspection of cable Replaced faulty connectors as needed Tested cable Isolated fault Repaired fiber optic cable Tested cable oN O oO A W N Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the
118. active participation of those being trained FM 7 0 provides detailed instructions for conducting an AAR and detailed guidance on coaching and critiquing during training 1 7 NCO SELF DEVELOPMENT AND THE SOLDIER S MANUAL a Self development is one of the key components of the leader development program Itis a planned progressive and sequential program followed by leaders to enhance and sustain their military competencies It consists of individual study research professional reading practice and self assessment Under the self development concept the NCO as an Army professional has the responsibility to remain current in all phases of the MOS The SM is the primary source for the NCO to use in maintaining MOS proficiency b Another important resource for NCO self development is the Army Correspondence Course Program ACCP Soldiers can access the ACCP online at http www atsc army mil accp aipdnew asp c General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library is an additional resource for NCO self development This electronic library is the single repository of approved Army training and doctrine information Soldiers can access the library online at http www train army mil d Unit learning centers are valuable resources for planning self development programs They can help access enlisted career maps training support products and extension training materials such as FMs and TMs It is the Soldier s responsibility t
119. actor FM 3 25 26 and TC 24 20 Standards Walked the line and verified the data on the telephone cable layout Performance Steps 1 Perform map reconnaissance Refer to TC 24 20 2 Plot the coordinates of all terminal points Refer to TC 24 20 a Select primary and alternate routes b Identify difficult terrain areas c Identify crossings 3 Estimate amount of wire required Refer to FM 3 25 26 a Compute map distance Refer to FM 3 25 26 b Estimate amount of wire required Refer to TC 24 20 Estimate crossing construction materials required Refer to TC 24 20 4 5 Estimate amount of time required 6 Determine personnel requirements in accordance with personnel assets 7 Conduct ground reconnaissance Refer to TC 24 20 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Performed map reconnaissance Plotted the coordinates of all terminal points Estimated amount of wire required Estimated crossing construction materials required Estimated amount of time required Determined personnel requirements in accordance with personnel assets N OO A ODN Conducted ground reconnaissance Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly
120. afety goggles when soldering or desoldering c Keep the work area clear of debris d Use soldering iron holder to eliminate burns 3 84 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps e Never flick solder from the soldering iron wipe solder from the tip f Inspect the soldering iron for defects frayed cord cracked handle g Never solder a live circuit Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified a soldering termination Identified types of soldering irons Identified different soldering iron tips Identified soldering aids Made a solder connection Identified methods of soldering Identified the six basic steps of quality soldering oN O oO A W N Identified safety requirements for soldering Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals TB 385 4 12 August 2008 3 85 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL CABLE RACK AND WIRE WAY 113 583 1002 Conditions Given straight splicing clamp corner clamp corner braces edge clamp hanger clips J bolt rack feet wireway cable duct tools material and references Standards Installed cable rack or wireway in accordance with engineering
121. age if required a b C d e Open cable Dry conductors Repair conductors Repair cable sheath Wrap core Note 1 When cable core is filled repair operations should be accomplished if possible without removing the filling compound The compound is removed only from those cable conductors which need repairing Note 2 When the cable core is filled the cable core is replaced in the sheath without wrapping Note 3 If the cable is pressurized a pressure plug must be installed before the cable sheath is opened This is to prevent loss of pressure 4 Close cable a b Clean sheath and apply cement Apply tapes 12 August 2008 3 49 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps Note Cable damage that has excessive injury to the sheath may require the removal of a portion of the plastic sheath These cables may be closed by the use of a splice case or closure 5 Repair cable terminals in plastic sheathed cable a Repair strand mounted terminals b Repair distribution terminals c Repair cross connect terminals 6 Repair cable pedestals 7 Locate and repair pressurization leaks Evaluation Preparation Setup None Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier to observe safety precautions concerning open flames propane gas and other pressurized gases Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Repaired minor sheath damage to aerial buried and underground plastic sheathed cable if required 2 Performed a
122. aily Standing operating procedures SOPs sign in rosters etc d Check for presence of eye wash area e Check for the presence of proper safety gear Face shield gloves apron etc Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected AC power distribution system 2 Inspected the distribution panel 3 Inspected the branch circuits 4 Inspected electrical devices 3 144 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO GO Inspected wiring in the conduit Inspected wiring boxes and electrical devices Inspected for correct grounding rule use Inspected for correct mounting of electrical boxes Inspect for correct termination conductor on the device O OO N OQ O 10 Inspected for correct performance of quality control checks 11 Inspected for correct switch installation 12 Inspected the dress and terminate conductors in the distribution panel 13 Inspected that the distribution panel is correctly labeled 14 Inspected for evidence that proper AC safety measures were used during installation 15 Inspected DC power 16 Inspected the DC power wiring color code for correctness 17 Inspected the battery racks for correct installation in accordance with the EIP and that the protective coating was not removed from the racks 18 Inspected the
123. all c Mark the line After marking the points using one of the methods given stretch a chalk line to intersect the greatest number of points 5 Draft the baseline Since it is not practical to draw a line of considerable length at a right angle to another using a carpenter s square the following methods may be used to mark a true 90 degree angle a The 3 4 5 Method Any multiple of these basic numbers can be used for example 6 8 10 or 9 12 15 It is the best method for confined areas This method can be used to establish a line at a right angle to another and to extend lines beyond obstructions 1 Refer to the EIP drawings to determine where the line is to be located and mark it on the reference line or baseline as point 1 2 From point 1 measure 4 feet or a multiple along the reference or baseline and make a second mark Refer to this mark as point 2 3 Using a 3 foot fabricated compass or a multiple length swing an arc perpendicular 90 degrees from point 1 4 Using a 5 foot fabricated compass or a multiple length swing an arc from point 2 intersecting the arc from point 1 Refer to this mark as point 3 5 Snap a chalk line through point 1 and point 3 90 degrees from the reference line or baseline b The Linear Bisection Method Also called the geometrical bisection method 1 Refer to the drawings to determine where the right angle is to be located and mark it on the reference line or baseline as point 1
124. all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 129 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON TEST SETS 113 574 7014 Conditions Given telephone test sets AN GTM 12 TS 3647 G or TS 4117 G 4 inch flat tip screwdriver dust brush cleaning rags DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 6625 3292 12 TM 6625 3227 13 amp P and TM 11 5805 703 14 Standards Supervised individuals performing ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the telephone test set was operational or evacuated defective test set to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps 1 Ensure that DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 are available Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Supervise routine checks a Clean wash and dust b Check for frayed cables broken connectors or bent pins c Inspect case and cover for visible damage d Inspect battery case or power source for broken wires or damaged connectors e Tighten loose screws 3 Verify that DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 have been completed Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Note Ensure to read all WARNINGS and NOTES applied to each test set in their designated TM Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Ensured that DA Form 2404 and DA For
125. am 750 8 and TM 11 5805 201 12 Standards Performed ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 or evacuated defective telephone set to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps WARNING Trichlorotrifluoroethane fumes are toxic Provide ventilation whenever it is used 1 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Perform routine checks Refer to TM 11 5805 210 12 a Clean dust and wash b Check for frayed cables c Store unused items d Cover unused receptacles e Check for loose nuts bolts and screws 3 Check telephone set TA 312 PT a Batteries b Binding posts c Battery compartment 4 Check case telephone set 5 Check handset 6 Complete DA Forms 2404 and 2408 14 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Initiated DA Form 2404 Performed routine checks Refer to TM 11 5805 201 12 Checked telephone set TA 312 PT Checked case telephone set Checked handset Completed DA Forms 2404 and 2408 14 O oa A W N Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 12 August 2008 3 77 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References 3 78 Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8
126. and reestablished communications Performance Steps 1 Verify that the trouble exists Verify that the KY 68 is getting power Refer to TM 11 5810 329 10 Troubleshoot the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system Refer to TM 11 5810 329 10 Identify malfunction s Take corrective actions Refer to TM 11 5810 329 10 O oa A W N Reestablish communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified that the trouble existed Verified that the KY 68 was getting power Troubleshot the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system Identified malfunction s Took corrective actions O oa A W N Reestablished communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5810 329 10 AR 25 55 TM 11 5820 864 12 1 AR 380 40 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 DA Pam 25 380 2 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 TB 380 41 TM 11 5820 931 12 1 TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P 3 70 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL TELEPHONE SET TA 312 PT 113 600 1012 Conditions Given a telephone set TA 312 PT battery BA 30 or BA 3030 2 each tool equipment TE 33 installed telephone cable WD 1 TT tags grease pencil TM 11 5805 201 12 and TC 24 20 Standards Install the telephone set and
127. and Maintenance Earth Boring and Polesetting M764 W W 2320 00 937 5980 26 September 1980 Unit Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List Including Depot Maintenance Repair Parts and Special Tools List for Truck Cargo Tactical 1 1 4 Ton 4X4 M1008 NSN 2320 01 123 6827 Truck Cargo Tactical 1 1 4 Ton 4X4 M1008A1 2320 01 123 2671 Truck Utility Tactical 3 4 Ton 4X4 M1009 2320 01 123 2665 Truck Ambulance Tactical 1 1 4 Ton 4X4 M1010 2310 10 123 2666 Truck Shelter Carrier Tactical 1 1 4 Ton 4X4 M1028 2320 01 127 5077 Truck Shelter Carrier W PTO Tactical 1 1 4 Ton 4X4 M1028A1 2320 01 158 0820 Truck Shelter Carrier W PTO Tactical 1 1 4 Ton Ton 4X4 M1028A3 2320 01 325 1937 Truck Chassis Tactical 1 1 4 Ton 4X4 M1031 2320 01 133 5368 1 May 1992 Tactical Wire and Cable Techniques 3 October 1988 References 5 This page intentionally left blank STP 11 25L13 SM TG 12 August 2008 By Order of the Secretary of the Army GEORGE W CASEY Jr General United States Army Chief of Staff Official Prr a P JOYCE E MORROW Administrative Assistant to the Secretary of the Army 0820412 DISTRIBUTION Active Army Army National Guard and U S Army Reserve To be distributed in accordance with the initial distribution number IDN 115432 requirements for STP 11 25L13 SM TG This page intentionally left blank PIN 082277 000
128. and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 12 August 2008 4 39 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN BROADBAND DIPOLE HIGH FREQUENCY HF ANTENNA 113 596 3049 Conditions Given broadband HF antenna installed tools and equipment safety equipment DA Form 2404 and DA Pam 750 8 Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Performed maintenance checked all support poles coaxial cables and antenna curtains for signs of deterioration checked guys for tension and recorded uncorrected faults on DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Check support pole for deterioration 2 Check guys for tension 3 Check antenna curtain for signs of deterioration WARNING The supervisor will ensure the radio power is turned OFF before the Soldiers climb the broadband HF antenna 4 Check coaxial cable for signs of deterioration 5 Record uncorrected faults on DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Checked support pole for deterioration 2 Checked guys for tension 3 Checked antenna curtain for signs of deterioration 4 Checked coaxial cable for signs of deterioration 5 Recorded uncorrected faults on DA F
129. any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 3 82 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 6 LAN WAN SUBSTATION PERFORM SOLDERING TECHNIQUES 113 583 1001 Conditions Given a soldering iron solder flux rosin material and notes Standards Identified quality of soldered electrical terminations Performance Steps 1 Identify a soldering termination a b c Soldering The process of joining two metals wire and terminal by heat transfer using a low al Electrical termination The connection of an electrical conductor to various fixed terminals usually by one of two methods soldering or mechanical Soldered termination A mechanical connection between wire and terminal which are bonded by applying solder Mechanical The process of joining a wire and a terminal by external pressure temperature cohesive alloy Solder The solder used in electronics is an alloy usually made with 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead 1 The greater the tin content the lower temperature required to liquefy the solder 2 When soldering conductors use a rosin core solder Never use acid core solder on electrical connections Flux rosin This is a chemical cleaning agent that promotes wetting of metals and helps prevent oxidation 1 Reliable solder connections can only be a
130. ards Inspected the installed procedures in accordance with TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 5805 201 12 and manufacturer s reference material Performance Steps 1 Inspect pre installation checks on the cable and wire system a Inspect reconnaissance findings b Inspect construction order c Inspect line route map d Inspect results of wire electrical test 2 Inspect the installation of surface cable wire a Inspect for appropriate slack 20 percent along the line b Inspect ties 1 Made at ground level 2 Off the road and road shoulder 3 Out of major traffic area inside buildings offices 3 Inspect the installation of aerial cable wire road crossing was to standard in accordance with TC 24 20 a Inspect that lines are tied securely at both ends of the aerial span b Inspect for 6 inches of sag for every 25 feet of span length c Inspect for minimum of 18 feet clearance over primary roads and 14 feet clearance over secondary roads 4 Inspect installed buried cable wire crossing a Inspect tagging 1 Tag is approximately 6 inches from stake 2 Alllines are tagged at road railroad bridge and aerial crossings 3 Lines are tagged when wire changes construction technique for example surface to underground or surface to aerial b Inspect for enough slack excess to replace existing wire 5 Inspect operational test results a Ensure tests are completed on each reel cable prior to installation 1 As eac
131. as the critical tasks to be trained in an MOS and the type of training required resident integration or sustainment Subject Area column This column lists the subject area number and title Task Number column This column lists the task numbers for all tasks included in the subject area Title column This column lists the task title for each task in the subject area Training Location column This column identifies the training location where the task is first trained to Soldier training publications standards If the task is first trained to standard in the unit the word Unit will be in this column If the task is first trained to standard in the training base it will identify by brevity code ANCOC BNCOC etc the resident course where the task was taught Figure 2 1 contains a list of training locations and their corresponding brevity codes Trained in the Unit Advanced Individual Training Basic NCO Course Advanced NCO Course Additional Skill Identifier Figure 2 1 Training Locations 12 August 2008 2 1 STP 11 25L13 SM TG e Sustainment Training Frequency Column This column indicates the recommended frequency at which the tasks should be trained to ensure Soldiers maintain task proficiency Figure 2 2 identifies the frequency codes used in this column Biannually Annually Semiannually Quarterly Monthly Biweekly Weekly Figure 2 2 Sustainment Training Frequency Codes e Sustainment Training Ski
132. as been revised the 1 will change to a two 2 or whatever revision number applies EXAMPLE PJ214E DI90001 3 98 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 Identify minor and major drawing changes a Minor changes are changes that do not alter the specified floor plan major equipment list violate a mandatory standard effect the intended operational capability the required testing or the end result b Major changes are changes that will alter equipment layout operation mode require using different equipment or the deleting equipment The project engineer must approve any major change c Marking changes on the drawing Marking or red lining drawings will be done in the following colors 1 Yellow All items to be deleted will be high lighted in yellow 2 Red All items to be added will be in red 3 Blue or Black Are instructions or explanations of changes to the drafts person and will not be part of the drawing d Disposition of drawings on completion of the installation 1 The Installation team leader will correct all three sets of installation drawings showing the result of the completed EIP 2 One set of drawing will be left on site and the other two will be returned to the project engineer 4 Perform validation and testing a Testing will be preformed IAW the test plan in the EIP b The sequence of testing will be included in the EIP and may require some tests before during and after the i
133. at the fault had been identified and located Performance Steps 1 Direct the use of the TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC troubleshooting flowcharts Refer to TM 11 5805 706 12 for the TD 1233 P TTC or TM 11 5805 707 12 for the TD 1234 P TTC Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Directed the use of the TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC troubleshooting flowcharts Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5805 706 12 TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 707 12 TM 11 5805 384 12 TM 11 5805 650 12 TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 5995 208 10 3 164 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON MULTIPLEXERS 113 606 7031 Conditions Given a TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC with ULM already performed DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Standards Verified that the TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC passed the self test and verified that fault were annotated on DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Inspect ULM in accordance with TM maintenance chart Refer to TM 11 5805 706 12 for the TD 1233 P TTC or TM 11 5805 707 12 for the TD 1234 P TTC 2 Inspect completed DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO
134. ate tester BERT faa uu 12 August 2008 3 7 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 8 Test fabricated RF cable Cable defects may not be visible but can be detected with proper testing The two primary pieces of test equipment used to test RF cable assemblies are the Megger and BERT a b The Megger can to test for continuity dielectric strength breakdown and shorts with or without connectors The Data Transmission Test Set DTTS Model 604M is one of the BERTs It consists of a transmitter and receiver that operate independent of one another The DTTS constructs error free data patterns and compares them on a bit by bit basis to detect errors induced by the cable or connectors Refer to the manufacture s instructions for the test set you are using 9 Inspect RF cable and assemblies The following quality control checks should be followed throughout the installation a b When required secure the cable in the same manner as signal cable C d Butting and stripping should be done IAW the connector manufacturer s specifications Use a e Inspect and test the cable for damage or defects before installation Observe the minimum bending radius at all times template to speed the process Place permanent cable tags on cables as prescribed Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 oO ON DODO FP ODN Identified the elements of RF coaxial cable Identified the classifications of RF c
135. be installed 2 Move the straightedge over the entire area Use a level on top of the straightedge 3 Look for gaps under the straightedge indicating low spots High spots can be detected using the level Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified the purpose of marking site layout Identified marking site layout terms Prepared for marking site layout Drafted a reference line Drafted the Baseline Drafted extended lines beyond obstructions Drafted an overhead layout Drafted a wall layout o ON O Oo A W N Determined the level of the floor Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 103 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL LOCAL AREA NETWORK WIDE AREA NETWORK LAN WAN SUBSTATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 113 583 1009 Conditions Given CAT 5 D 814 impact tool with 110 blade RJ 45 crimp tool RJ 45 connectors work area outlet connector with RJ 45 jack jacket stripper splicer scissors snips tape measure feet metric and small flat tip screwdriver engineering drawings and Manufacturer s Manual Standards Terminated the CAT 5 cable using the appropriat
136. ble batteries appropriate COMSEC device waypoint information and related TMs Standards Initialized the GPS loaded with COMSEC variables waypoints and entered setup information and Soldier successfully navigated to 5 points in 30 minutes or less Performance Steps 1 Inspect inventory equipment for completeness and perform operator PMCS on GPS refer to correct TM for system 2 Place GPS into operation a Turn on GPS and await self test b Enter fill Note Only GPS loaded with crypto variable keys should be used for combat operations Without crypto keys GPS cannot compensate for selective availability SA errors cannot read encrypted signals and has no protection against spoofing Not having crypto keys loaded could result in mission failure Note Installing crypto keys does not create a classified GPS When classified mission data waypoints is stored the GPS is classified at the same level as the classified mission data c Observe display for acquisition of satellites for time and position location 3 Enter waypoints 4 Navigate using GPS 5 points within 30 minutes 5 Perform shut down procedures a Turn off GPS b Store GPS Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected inventoried equipment for completeness and performed operator PMCS on GPS used correct TM for equipment 2 Placed GPS into operation 3 Entered waypoints 4 Navigated successfully using GPS to 5 point
137. breakers and check the work site with a meter 5 Post danger sign on the distribution panel and put your personal safety lock on the panel 6 Use a light grip on tools don t slip and hit a hot terminal 7 Avoid working in damp or wet locations 8 Always do neat work well dressed wires are less likely to short and cause a hazard 9 Always use a ground fault interrupter when working outside and whenever possible inside A ground fault interrupter has an internal circuitry which monitors the current and if it detects a difference of five milliamperes it will cut off the circuit within two milliseconds 10 Milliamperes 001 amp EFFECT 1 Can just feel it 5 Can t let go 20 50 Possibly fatal 60 amp up Probably fatal 5 Identify DC power a The big advantage of DC power systems is that when the commercial power is lost the batteries will continue to provide power to the equipment for a limited time b ADC power system can be made up of rectifier charger battery bank converter inverter and a power distribution system plus redundant equipment for higher reliability c Commercial AC power is converted to DC power using rectifiers to charge the battery bank and supply DC power DC power can be converted back to AC power using inverters for equipment that requires AC to operate d DC power sources and related equipment can be a serious source of RF noise 1 DC power systems are electrical noisy because of the inductive
138. bstruction 12 August 2008 3 101 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps b Tangents of Arcs This is the quickest method to extend a line around an obstruction 1 Using a fabricated compass with a radius long enough to clear the obstruction swing at least two 90 degree arcs from the line to be extended Do not intersect the arcs they need to be 90 degrees from the original line 2 Snap a chalk line at the apex the very top of each arc long enough to extend past the obstruction 3 Repeat the above steps using the same compass length in the reverse direction Snap a chalk line the same as before to extend the original line on the other side of the obstruction c Right Angles Method This method uses 90 degree angles to extend a line past an obstruction 1 Use either the 3 4 5 or the linear bisection method to lay at least 2 lines at a right angle perpendicular to to the line to be extended original line Be sure the lines are long enough to clear the obstruction 2 Measure an equal distance along each perpendicular 90 degrees to the original line and make a mark 3 Snap a chalk line through both points A This temporary line will be used to extend the original line Be sure it clears the obstruction 4 Repeat the steps above marking perpendicular lines from the temporary line in the opposite direction and on the other side of the obstruction Make sure the exact same measurements are used for points A1 as for points A
139. by system diagram 2 Inspect for proper connection of the power supply cord 3 fone for proper connection of the field cable to the TD 1233 P TTC group or TD 1234 P TTC igh Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected the programming of the circuit card by system diagram 2 Inspected for proper connection of the power supply cord 3 Inspected for proper connection of the field cable to the TD 1233 P TTC group or TD 1234 P TTC high Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5805 706 12 TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 707 12 12 August 2008 3 163 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT TROUBLESHOOTING OF MULTIPLEXERS 113 606 7030 Conditions Given multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC COU C 10716 field cable CX 11230 G telephone set TA 341 TT telephone set TA 838 TT digital subscriber voice terminal DSVT TSEC KY 68 telephone cable WF 16 U power cord TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Note This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation under all weather conditions it may be performed in an NBC environment Standards Inspected the troubleshooting of the TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC and verified th
140. c Line cord Chalk line Hammer drill floor anchoring b Use a hand operated crane to lift or move cells Lead acid cells are extremely heavy even when not filled with acid c Inspect all cells for cracks chips debris broken or warped components and other signs of damage d All terminals interconnecting straps and bolts will be coated with NO OX ID grease at each terminating point e The positive cell terminal connections will be made first then the negative to reduce the chance of an accident f The flooded cell type battery requires preparation of electrolyte Always pour ACID INTO WATER slowly PAWS NEVER water into acid Electrolyte is available in premixed solutions which is safer g Cells may be connected and arranged in series parallel or series parallel to provide the correct voltage and current h All equipment will be wired to a circuit breaker Under no conditions will connections be made until all testing for continuity and shorts have been completed Flooded cell type batteries are required to be located in a separate area To stack Absolyte modules horizontally you must perform a tip over procedure The module base assembly with l beam should be tipped over first es oe CAUTION Do not attempt to perform tip over of module manually as serious personal injury and module damage may result k Install four lifting shackles and two lifting straps Absolyte module assemblies are id
141. cal angle for support 5 Reinforcing stud Supports the vertical side 6 Transverse arm Welded to vertical angle and used to support cable 7 Jumper ring bar Three steel bars extending the length of the frame to attach jumper rings Jumper ring Used to guide the cross connects jumper wire from vertical to horizontal Terminal block mounting bar Used only on the horizontal side to support terminal blocks Terminal blocks Used to terminate cable Guard rail support Protects the terminal blocks from damage by ladders or other equipment 12 End guard Protects the ends of the frame 13 Finishing bar A flat finish bar that increases the strength of the frame and protects personnel from sharp ends of the bars 14 Grounding buss bar A flat copper bar that is attached to the station ground 8 9 10 11 YS PS a 3 Install a distribution frame a The first step is to inspect the floor plan which should show the location of equipment and significant features of the building b Install angles 1 Angles for distribution frames are furnished in the required lengths 2 Floor angles are placed on vertical face lines as shown on floor plans When two or more angles are required fasten each angle loosely until an entire line has been installed Angles must be level with each other to build up the low spots on the floor use light metal shims the width of the floor angle and at least 4 inches long 12
142. cases d Seal ducts 3 44 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Conducted pre installation activities 2 Installed cable system 3 Terminated cable 4 Conducted post installation activities Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related USAF TO 31 10 3 12 August 2008 3 45 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL A CAD 6 BURIED DISTRIBUTION TERMINAL 113 588 1108 Conditions Given a CAD 6 distribution terminal a ground rod ground connector mounting stake a shovel engineer specifications and manufacturer s manual Note Supervision and assistance are available Standards Installed the CAD 6 terminal according to engineer specifications Performance Steps 1 2 3 4 Determine CAD 6 terminal location using engineer specifications Prepare location dig section of earth in an 8 x 8 square and 16 inches deep Remove covers of the CAD 6 terminal a Separate upper and lower front covers b Unlock the divider plate and swing it open Note DO NOT use the divider plate to lift or carry the cable closure Install mounting stake 5 Install grounding rod place ground rod on the right side of the back plate a
143. cated from 12 AWG or larger solid or stranded green insulated copper wire 1 All wireway or duct will be bonded to the fault protection subsystem at power panels 2 One continuous green wire can be used for bonding the wireway 3 Bond all sections including lids with straps fabricated from 12 AWG or larger solid or stranded green insulated wire Star washers will be used to provide a good bond 4 When all sections have been strapped the duct is bonded to ground not more than 2 feet from each end of the run and every 50 feet along the run using 6 AWG green wire Note Only one ground point for each lid is required Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified cable rack and wireway 2 Planned installation of cable rack and wireway 12 August 2008 3 89 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures O OoOo AN O a A O Identified cable rack hardware Identified the types of support Installed supporting material Identified safe load capacities Reduced cable rack Grounded bond cable rack Installed wireway cable duct Identified restrictions of wireway Installed wireway couplings Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References
144. cation procedures using the TS 4336 G e Repair the CX 13295 G using cable repair kit MK 2495 G if required f Perform final operational test to verify normal operation of the FOCA 8 Complete applicable blocks on DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2407 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Tested the FOTS for proper operation Verified all switch and control settings and equipment controls Troubleshot the FOCA using the TS 4117 G from either end A W N If outside of limits had shelter operator check the FOM if within limits proceeded to the next connector until fault was found Replaced the FOCA as needed Reestablished communications Maintained the FOCA CX 13295 G N OQ A Completed applicable blocks on DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2407 12 August 2008 3 55 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2407 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 6020 200 10 TM 11 6020 200 23 amp P TM 11 6625 3227 13 amp P 3 56 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TROUBLESHOOT FIBER OPTIC CABLE 113 632 5002 Conditions Given a pre installed Fiber Optic C
145. ccomplished with clean surfaces Flux removes oxides which must melt at a lower temperature so it can do its job before the actual soldering process 2 Available in liquid or paste form Flux disintegrates when heated and usually dissipates during the soldering process Oxidation This is the chemical corrosion of metal that takes place quickly at temperatures above 750 degrees Fahrenheit 2 Identify types of soldering irons a b C Soldering irons come in various sizes and capacity ratings wattage to suit requirements for size gauge and type of terminals and conductors 1 Sixty to one hundred watt irons are suitable for most conductor terminations and electrical applications 2 The speed of soldering required along with the solder melting temperature The 60 40 alloy solder melts around 374 degrees Fahrenheit Clean the tip of the soldering iron before using by heating it and wiping it on a damp sponge To properly perform a temperature test place solder on the tip when solder melts the iron is at its working temperature 3 Identify different soldering iron tips a b Pencil point shaped tips are used for light duty c Pyramid shaped tips are for heavy duty d e Tinning the soldering iron tip cleans the tip by applying flux and a light coat of solder which Screwdriver shaped soldering tips are used for most electrical applications Chisel shaped tips are for special applications retards oxidat
146. ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetneeeeeentaeeeeeeaaes 3 147 113 588 7009 Inspect Recovery of Cable Wire Systems cccceeeeeneeeeeenneeeeeetaeeeeeeeneeeeeeaaes 3 149 113 588 7011 Inspect Troubleshooting of Cable Wire Systems ccceeeeeeeenteeeeeenteeeeeeeaes 3 151 113 632 9009 Inspect Operation of Fiber Optic Cable Test Set cccccccceecteeeeeeeeteeeeteeeteees 3 152 113 632 9012 Inspect Splicing of Fiber Optic Cable Assembly FOCA CX 13295 V G 3 153 113 574 9001 Inspect Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Test Sets cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 3 154 113 588 5007 Plan a Telephone Cable Line 0 ccccccceeeeeeceeceeeee eee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseceaaeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 155 113 588 6001 Inspect Existing Cable Lines 0 0 00 cece ee eeeeeeeenneeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeesenaeeeeneaes 3 156 113 588 6007 Prepare a Detailed Cable Route Map cccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetecenaeeeeeeeeeenees 3 158 113 588 7075 Inspect Polesine eeo od e a e ea nae aetna 3 159 Subject Area 13 TELEPHONE MAINTENANCE TRUCK INSPECTION 113 588 7108 Inspect Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS of Telephone Maintenance Truck cccccccceeseeececeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeesesanaeeaeeeeeeeseeeenanaeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 160 Subject Area 14 TELEPHONE SETS INSPECTION 113 600 7045 Inspect Installation Of KY 68 cccccccececeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeececaeaeeeeeeeeeeseneaaeeeeeeeeeteees 3 161 113 600 7046 Inspect Troubleshooting
147. ceptacle to provide unswitched power c Check that tab is unbroken if both receptacles are to be switched 3 Check that silver terminal screw is connected to the neutral conductor 4 Check that the silver tab is intact regardless of being switched or unswitched to provide neutral for the second silver terminal on the second receptacle 5 Check that the green ground terminal in connected with the green insulated conductor f Check wiring of a 120 240 V AC duplex receptacle both receptacles unswitched 1 Ensure that the source L 1 that originates from the circuit breaker or a previous outlet splices connected to the brass terminal screw on the receptacle 2 Check that the TAB is unbroken which provides 120 V AC to the first receptacle terminal 3 Check the source L 2 to ensure it is connected to the opposite brass terminal to provide the second leg for the 240 V AC receptacle Note This receptacle MUST be identified as L 2 4 Check the silver terminal screw for connection to the neutral insulated conductor originating at the neutral buss bar or a splice form a previous outlet Only the 120 V AC receptacle requires the neutral conductor 5 Check to ensure there is no tab at the neutral terminal If there is a tab it must be removed 6 Check the green terminal screw for connection to the green insulated conductor g Check wiring of 120 240 V AC duplex receptacle switched 1 Check that the brass terminal screw
148. clips with hex nuts are used to adjust the required space between racks 12 August 2008 3 87 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Install supporting material a Lipped channel Unistrut is a brand name can be square or rectangular made of 12 14 or 16 gauge steel alloy and comes in 10 foot or 20 foot lengths It can be used with a 5 8 inch threaded rod to support cable rack or duct 1 The open side of slotted channel has two 90 degree bends These edges are the clamping ridges designed to position and lock a special nut commonly called a spring nut One side of the nut has two grooves that engage the clamping ridges and the other side has a spring to keep it in place When the nut is drawn tight against the clamping ridges the grooves in the nut securely bridge the sides of the channel together 2 The ends of spliced channels should be butted together however in no case shall the space exceed 1 8 inch 3 Cable racks may be supported by a lipped channel trapeze b Framing bar may be used instead of a lipped channel except where the channel must mount directly to the ceiling Framing bars require a minimum of 2 inches between the ceiling and the top of the bar c Channel may also be used for rack support 1 Channel comes in 20 foot lengths and measures 2 inches by 9 11 of an inch 2 All rules for Unistrut and framing bar apply to channel 3 The use of channel for rack support is limited to short runs and light l
149. connector on adapter cable W100 c Turn on the test set d Set the AUTO SINGLE switch to AUTO e Set the FUNCTION switch to X TALK Note The stimuli are applied in turn to the wire pair displayed on the left starting with pair 01 while the higher numbered pairs are displayed on the right They are being scanned for a response cross talk f Press and release the ADVANCE switch g Observe the flashing TEST light and if the test set is powered in the AC or external DC mode the advancing circuit numbers in the display window 01 01 01 02 01 26 02 02 02 03 etc to 24 26 25 25 25 26 26 26 12 August 2008 3 35 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps Note If the test sequence stops and the FAULT light illuminates record the numbers of the defective wire pairs as shown in the display window If the test sequence proceeds through 25 26 and the END light illuminates skip the remaining steps h Repeat steps e and f until the test sequence proceeds through 25 26 and the END light illuminates Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected the physical appearance of the cable 2 Performed troubleshooting procedures with the AN GTM 12 by testing the CX 4566 G 26 pair cable 3 Performed Conductor Continuity Measurement Pair Test 4 Performed IR test i 5 Performed XTALKtest o O o oM Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM
150. cords assorted circuit card assembly CCA cards TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Standards Powered up all equipment and the system was green Performance Steps 1 Connect the ground power cables and the CX 11230A U 2 Check all CCA switches for correct configuration 3 Turn power on for equipment 4 Check for fault light s on the TD 1233 P TTC TD 1234 P TTC and CCAs 5 Turn equipment power off properly Performance Measures 1 Connected the ground power cables and the CX 11230A U 2 Checked all CCA switches for correct configuration 3 Turned power on for equipment 4 Checked for fault light s on the TD 1233 P TTC TD 1234 P TTC and CCAs 5 Turned all equipment power off Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 3 62 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL LINE TERMINATION UNIT LTU CV 4180 113 606 1002 Conditions Given an LTU CV 4180 LTU cabling set cable CX 11230A G cable CX 4566 G telephone set s TA 954 TT or equivalent DNVT TA 1042 or equivalent telephone cable WF 16 U power cord batteries BA 30 or BA 3042 for TA 838 TT or equivalent assorted CCA cards J 1077 box OPORD or a Syste
151. ct all batteries prior to filling and installing Observe all safety requirements and recommendations Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 O o N O o A W N mk Installed AC wire through conduit Identified wiring boxes and electrical devices Labeled a distribution panel Identified AC safety Identified DC power Identified DC power wiring color code Installed battery racks Installed batteries Identified placement and numbering of cells Installed connectors Identified safety precautions Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related MIL HDBK 419A MIL STD 188 124B 3 TB 385 4 The National Electric Code NEC 12 August 2008 3 19 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL CABLE WIRE SYSTEMS 113 588 2006 Conditions Given cable or wire reel unit RL 31 can be vehicle mounted marline cord drive hooks installed on poles tool equipment TE 21 and TE 33 existing poles or trees lance poles A frames stakes shovel hammer gloves tags grease pencil system diagram team of Soldiers TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 5805 201 12 TM 11 6110 201 12P TM 11 389
152. d 80 degrees centigrade c Foamed polyethylene Semiflex helix in sizes from 1 2 inch to 1 5 8 inches d Teflon DuPont Can withstand temperatures from 80 to 250 degrees e Neoprene Also known as Polytetrafluoroethylene 3 The outer conductor Acts as the return or shield a Flexible and semirigid cables usually have outer conductors of copper braid wire to permit flexibility b Rigid cables have an outer conductor that consists of hard drawn seamless copper tubing 4 The jacket or sheathing Flexible and semirigid cables have an outer sheathing used to protect the cable from abrasion and from harmful chemicals Common jacket materials are synthetic rubber polyethylene and synthetic resin The jacket color may identify the type of cable 5 Armor Armor is used when greater protection for the cable is required Armor can be made of braided wires aluminum or galvanized steel 6 Moisture Seals The armor is sometimes rubber coated for moisture proofing 3 4 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 2 Identify the classifications of RF cable a These categories are based on the temperature range operating voltage and the attenuation stability b RF cable is classified into three categories Flexible semiflexible and rigid 1 Flexible RF cable is the most versatile and widely used It consists of a center conductor a low loss solid or semisolid dielectric and one or more braided outer conduct
153. d for fault light s on TD 1233 P TTC TD 1234 P TTC and CCAs 5 Ensured power was turned off properly Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 12 August 2008 3 131 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE TROUBLESHOOTING OF MULTIPLEXERS 113 606 7027 Conditions Given individual s multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC or multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC cable CX 11230A G telephone set s TA 838 TT or equivalent DNVT TA 1042 or equivalent telephone cable WF 16 U power cord batteries BA 30 or BA 3042 for TA 838 TT or equivalent assorted circuit card assemblies CCAs TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Standards Supervised that the individual s corrected the fault and reestablished communications Performance Steps Refer to Troubleshooting Flowcharts in TM 11 5805 706 12 for the TD 1233 P TTC and to TM 11 5805 707 12 for the TD 1234 P TTC for all performance steps 1 Verify that all CCA switches are in the correct configuration Verify that the problem has been determined Ensure that the self test has been initiated Verify that the fault has been localized Ensure the fault has been corrected or the defective
154. d into the drilled hole and tap lightly until the head is flush with the mounting surface 3 Insert the screw through the mounting hole of the fixture and into the expansion shield Machine bolt anchor 1 Installation of the machine bolt anchor requires a pre drilled hole corresponding to the diameter of the anchor before expansion and the depth equal to the length of the expansion shield plus the tip of the screw 2 Insert the shield into the drilled hole and tap lightly until the head is flush with the mounting surface 3 Insert the screw through the mounting hole of the fixture and into the expansion shield Lag screw anchor 1 Installation of the lag screw anchor requires a pre drilled hole corresponding to the diameter of the anchor before expansion and the depth equal to the length of the expansion shield plus the tip of the screw 2 Insert the shield into the drilled hole and tap lightly until the head is flush with the mounting surface 3 Insert the screw through the mounting hole of the fixture and into the expansion shield Toggle bolt anchor 1 Drill a hole the size that will accommodate the folded toggle 2 Remove the bolt from the toggle and insert bolt through the mounting hole of the fixture 3 Replace toggle on the bolt The flop over toggle should be screwed onto the bolt only far enough to assure attachment to allow gravity to activate the flop over mechanism 4 Insert toggle bolt into dri
155. d mark it with a hammer and center punch Using a standard drill drill a 1 8 inch hole pilot hole Enlarge the hole with a 3 8 inch drill this process is usually more accurate and will prevent the drill bit from wandering Install the 3 8 inch draw stud and the 1 2 inch conduit die Insert the draw stud with die into the pilot hole and thread the 1 2 inch conduit punch on the draw stud until tight Ensure that the draw stud threads are fully engaged in the punch Close the control knob by turning clockwise and pump the driver lever until the punch has completely penetrated the material Remove the driver from the hole and release the draw stud by turning the control knob counterclockwise Remove the punch die and draw stud Install the 3 4 inch draw stud then select the punch and die for the desired size hole Repeat steps d through f Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Observed safety rules while operating power tools Operated reciprocating saw n ve Operated the band saw 2 3 4 Operated the rotary hammer impact hammer 5 Operated Greenlee hydraulic punch driver Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals The
156. d to source and the other side is connected to the device 3 Check that neutral conductor is NEVER connected to switches 4 Check that the ground conductor is properly connected to the device b Check double throw switch installation 1 Check that the hot L 1 L 2 is connected to the switch with black colored conductor 2 Check that the device is connected to the L 1 side of the switch with a black colored conductor 3 Check that the neutral conductor is connected to the designated neutral buss bar position at the distribution panel and routed directly to the device through the conduit 4 Check that the ground conductor is connected to the designated position on the ground buss bar at the distribution panel and routed through the conduit c Check three way switch installation 1 Check that the first terminal is wired to the source 2 Check that both traveler terminals of the first switch traveler terminals with a hot connector 3 Check that the common terminal of the second switch is connected to hot terminal of the device to be controlled 4 Check that the neutral conductor is connected to the designated position on the neutral buss bar at the distribution panel and routed through the conduit to all devices requiring neutral connection for that branch circuit 5 Check the ground conductor to ensure it is terminated to the designated position on the ground buss bar at the distribution panel and routed through the co
157. dd Y3SN MOOE AVNODS LN3AIGAdX 3 07314 R 1 Sample of a completed DA Form 5165 Figure B 12 August 2008 B 2 Glossary SECTION I ACRONYMS amp ABBREVIATIONS 12 August 2008 FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Unclassified version First Sergeant after action review alternating current Army Correspondence Course Program Automated Information System Advanced Individual Training Army Knowledge Online ampere s Annually frequency code Advanced Noncommissioned Officer Course American National Standards Institute Army Regulation Army Reserve Army National Guard Army National Guard of the United States Army Training and Evaluation Program Additional Skill Identifier attention American Wire Gauge biannually frequency code bit error rate tester built in test equipment Basic Noncommissioned Officer Course Bill of Material Biweekly frequency code category common battery circuit card assembly combined distribution frame communications electronics configuration item identification number command Civil Military Operations communications communications security continuity pair continental United States the numbered Armies in the continental United States cable orderwire unit cable running list Communications Systems Installation Record Command Sergeant Major Combat Training Center s Department of the Army decibel Direct Current District of Columbia digital nonsecure voice telephone
158. degree bends 5 The rim notch mark is used only for the A bend of the saddle 6 The star mark is used for the regular 90 degree bends only 7 The degree marks are for 22 degrees 30 degrees 45 degrees and 60 degrees and are on the heel of the bender 8 The one shot conduit bender bends one size of EMT and it can bend the next smaller size rigid e g 3 4 inch EMT bender will bend 1 2 inch rigid e Hickey bender is a manual bender used mainly to bend rigid conduit f Mechanical benders 1 Used to bend the same conduit sizes as the hydraulic bender 2 Mechanical benders use an electric motor and gearbox to apply force g Hydraulic benders 1 Hydraulic benders are used to bend EMT larger than 1 inch and rigid conduit larger than 3 4 inch 2 The hydraulic bender consists of a hand operated pump and a hydraulic ram with hoses and various sizes of shoes and rails 15 Bend conduit a Conduit bending is a two person operation One person aligns the conduit while the other uses the bender b Conduit is always bent on a hard flat surface c When marking conduit use a grease pencil and mark it completely around the conduit at the point of the bend d The start of the conduit where the installer makes the first bend is called the committed end of the conduit The other end is the non committed end e An offset consists of two bends of equal degrees in opposite directions All bends start with marking a 2 inch constant completel
159. der false floors and in false ceilings Conduit will be bent to conform to walls and equipment fittings A pull box will take the place of an elbow or bend in a conduit run when there is more than the equivalent of 4 quarter bends 360 degrees total including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting g Communications cables and power conductors cannot occupy the same conduit distribution system h A physical and electrical separation is required between conduits containing RED unencrypted clear data or RED power conductors from conduit containing BLACK encrypted secure data or power conductors Conduit running from a BLACK area to a RED area may require a piece of PVC conduit placed in the run to break the electrical connection between the RED and BLACK areas 4 OAQ 4 Identify conduit cutting tools a A pipe cutter is a tool that consists of a handle and a sharp edged wheel that is forced inward by a screw that is tightened as the tool is rotated around the conduit b The conduit or tube cutter is a lightweight hand tool that works the same as a pipe cutter Do not use this type of cutter to cut rigid conduit it is designed for EMT and tubing only c A hacksaw can be used to cut any type of conduit and is normally used to cut flex or liquid tight flex conduit d A portable band saw is an electric heavy duty saw that can cut all types of metal conduit 5 Cut conduit a Always place rigid and EMT c
160. e configurations and all cabling passed test requirements Performance Steps 1 Conduct pre installation procedures a Identify remove and or mark any hazards before installation at each location b Select the cable support method to be used and complete all necessary preparations c Tie back any existing loose cables to avoid entanglements d Select the installation method raising or lowering and set up the associated hardware shoes sheaves supports winch and other needed equipment e Set up safety measures such as perimeters cones reels and sheave blocks f Use the rolling hitch knot to raise and lower heavy backbone cable g Test cable and annotate results Note Before starting the cable installation make sure enough cable is available for the entire cable installation If the cable installation was previously engineered then follow the engineer s statement of work Locate the footage numbers at both ends of the cable and subtract the numbers The results of the subtracted footage numbers indicate the length of available cable 2 Install cable a Route the cable through predetermined path b Pull enough additional cable to ensure that 24 inches of cable will be available at the work area outlet c Install a tip cable on a MDF using distribution rings d Test cable and annotate results 3 Terminate cable in work area a Inventory work area parts b Prepare cable for termination c Prepare and position conduct
161. e equipment as required Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Removed all installed equipment 2 Removed tower braces 3 Lowered braces to ground 4 Stored equipment as required Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related FM 11 487 27 4 12 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL SPIRA CONE HIGH FREQUENCY HF ANTENNA 113 596 1082 Conditions Given the spira cone HF antenna tools and equipment antenna safety manual and safety equipment Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions You will work as a team member to perform this task Standards Installed the spira cone HF antenna and assembled antenna curtains erected mast and anchored down lead guys to anchor points Performance Steps WARNING The supervisor will brief Soldiers on climbing procedures and being watchful of falling objects 1 Select site for antenna installation Inventory equipment Install base for antenna Install anchors Assemble mast section Install HF antenna curtains N O oO FB W N Install down lead guys Performance Measures GO NO GO
162. e guide loading coil and apparatus cases duct shields water activated cement cable sheave and shackle atmosphere tester manhole cover hooks ventilator and water pump and United States Air Force USAF Technical Order TO 31 10 3 Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Let Soldier know that assistance is available Standards Installed the underground cable system terminated cable if used and restored communications or sealed cable ends if not used Performance Steps WARNING There are numerous safety precautions to take into consideration with this task 1 Conduct pre installation activities Position safety equipment in proper locations Pump water from manholes Perform atmosphere test prior to entering in manholes Ventilate manholes Rod and clean ducts Test duct alignment Prepare cable reel and pulling apparatus Attach pulling line to the cable Install a cable grip on 25 pairs TQ 4 PDAnqT M 2 Install cable system a Attach cable guide b Lubricate cable c Pull cable through manholes d Repeat performance steps 1a through 2c for each manhole 3 Terminate cable a Install a tip cable on a main distribution frame MDF using distribution rings 4 Conduct post installation activities a Seal a cable using a B end cap b Tie and bond cable c Place underground load coil
163. e parts of the connector in the order of assembly and perform an inventory according to the manufacture s part list Ensure all parts are accounted for c Place the clamping nut over the cable with the threaded portion toward the end of the cable d Butt and strip the outer jacket from the cable according to manufacturer s specifications about 1 1 2 to 2 inches Nicking or cutting the braid or the inner conductor may cause electrical noise in the cable A cable stripping template for each type of connector will speed cable preparation Sometimes templates are supplied by the manufacturer e Use a wire brush or the hook end of spudger to comb the braid from the butt out until it is smooth Comb small portions at a time and take the time to make it even all around Fold the braid back over the cable butt and untangle all crossover strands of braid Cut the fillers separators even with the cable butt g Place the cone over the center conductors and into the cable butt between the wire braid and the center of the cable Considerable force may be required to seat the cone flush with the cable butt The clamping nut will not fit into the connector body if the cone is not seated all the way into the cable butt h Comb the wire braid back over the cone base and trim it using flush cutters Nippy Cutters even with the bottom edge of the cone Place the insulating washer over the center conductors and on top of the cone Strip the white
164. e thru box wiring will use the in the middle splice When splicing the ground conductor refer to the grounding rules n Dress and terminate conductors in a distribution panel 1 Conductors inside the distribution panel must be routed the most direct path taking into consideration the following a Never cross feeder paths with branch circuit conductors 3 14 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps b Always dress the conductors to the back of the panel staying tight to the back along the corners to the breakout point Bend the conductors 90 degrees staying tight against the back of the panel c Dress the conductors along the back working toward the termination point and in a way that prevents them from touching the buss bars d When the conductor reaches the termination point bend it 90 degrees to lift the conductor from the back of the panel toward the termination point e At the point where the conductor is level with the terminal bend it 90 degree toward the terminal so that it will feed straight into the terminal 2 Terminate conductors Always wire the distribution panel last a Always connect conductors in the order of their color Connect green first white or gray second and black hot last b Connect all grounds first green insulated conductors c Connect all neutrals white or gray insulated conductors second d Connect all hot black insulated conductors last e Trim excess but l
165. e used to drill the hole 2 Set the control on the impact drill to the hammer position Center the tool over the hole and operate the tool on impact until the teeth of the anchor have penetrated the surface marking the position of the hole 3 Turn the control to rotation hammer position and drill the hole into the concrete Stop when the bottom of the chuck is approximately a 1 16 inch from the surface 4 Remove the anchor and clean the debris with a blow bulb 5 Turn the control to the hammer position and place an expander wedge into the bottom of the anchor Insert the anchor with expander into the hole 6 With the impact drill in the hammer mode hammer the anchor until it is flush with the surface Cover the holes with tape if they are not to be used immediately b Two element non drilling expansion anchor 1 Drill the correct depth and diameter hole for the anchor 2 Clean out the hole with a blow bulb and insert the anchor by tapping lightly with a hammer until flush with the surface 3 94 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps C 3 Use the set tool to set the anchor by striking several blows with a hammer forcing the shield down over the cone to expand the shield Bolt and stud type anchor 1 To install the bolt stud anchor drill the correct depth and diameter hole for the anchor The hole must accommodate the bolt head with lead sleeve 2 Clean out the hole with a blow out bulb then inse
166. e wire fault Confirmed testing which verified repair Verified system link status O oa A W N Reported system link status to SCC or transmission chief Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 179 STP 11 25L13 SM TG ESTABLISH SITE LAYOUT FOR TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 113 593 1040 Conditions Given a team packet operations order OPORD with an 8 digit grid coordinate location for a transmission system and one or more of the following in accordance with unit SOP TM 11 5820 1022 13 1 AN TRC 191V TM 11 5820 864 12 1 AN TRC 174 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 AN TRC 173 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 AN TRC 138 TM 11 5820 934 13 1 1 AN TRC 170V and or TM 11 5820 1023 13 1 AN TRC 190V Standards Selected a site within 100 meters of the 8 digit grid coordinate and conformed to transmission systems requirements Performance Steps 1 Plot proposed site on map a Plot in and out routes on map b Plot all required line of sight LOS radio shots 2 Perform site reconnaissance Note Site reconnaissance should be done before moving transmission team to the site however the tactical situation may not allow this
167. eave enough to place in the terminal f Place the conductor in or next to the terminal and mark the point to strip the conductor of insulation g Using strippers strip the insulation from the mark to the end of the wire h Place the conductor in the terminal and tighten the set screw 3 Label a distribution panel a Label the panels as designated by the site drawings floor plan item number b If no guidance was provided a standard that can be used is room number and alphabetical designator example 4A would be room 4 panel A the next panel in the same room would be 4B and so on c Place labels on the top center portion of the inner and outer panels using 3 4 inch characters d Label group designations Example 120 240 V AC 60 Hz 3 Phase 1 Designate the highest voltage provided by this panel 2 AC alternating current abbreviation identifies the type of current 3 The designator 60 Hz identifies the frequency provided by this panel 4 The designation 3 Phase identifies the phase relationship of the panel 5 Label the inner and outer panels centered on the distribution panel number using 3 8 inch characters e Label number circuit breakers designations If not provided by the manufacturer label the circuit breakers using 3 16 inch characters The equipment circuit designation for equipment bays or common house commercial wiring will be labeled on the inner panel adjacent to the circuit breakers
168. ections tighten as required Checked air tubing line for loose connections tighten replace as required Checked pressure gauge for proper reading Checked cylinder for loose connections tighten as required Replaced nitrogen cylinder when it becomes empty Checked pressure gauge for proper reading Completed and submit DA Form 2404 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References 4 44 Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 12 August 2008 APPENDIX A DA Form 5164 R Hands On Evaluation A 1 Introduction This appendix provides a sample of DA Form 5164 R see Figure A 1 for the tasks in this STP DA Form 5164 R allows the trainer to keep a record of the performance measures a Soldier passes or fails on each task Trainers should use the following instructions for using this form A 2 Prior to Evaluating the Soldier a Obtain a blank copy of DA Form 5164 R which you may locally reproduce on 8 1 2 by 11 inch paper The form also can be downloaded from the U S Army Publishing Directorate at htto www apd army mil forms b Enter the task title and 10 digit task number from the Soldier s manual task summary in Chapter 3 c In column a enter the number of each PM listed
169. eeeeteee 3 129 113 574 7014 Supervise Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Test Sets 0 0 cee eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeee 3 130 113 606 7026 Supervise Installation of Multiplexers cccceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeteees 3 131 113 606 7027 Supervise Troubleshooting of Multiplexers 0 ccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 132 113 606 7028 Supervise Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Multiplexers n 3 133 Subject Area 10 TELEPHONE SETS SUPERVISION 113 600 7042 Supervise Installation Of KY 68 0 22 eceeeeeeceeeeeeeene test eeeeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeenenaeeeeeeaes 3 134 113 600 7043 Supervise Troubleshooting Of KY 68 cccceceeseneeeeeseneeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeeetaeeeeeeaes 3 135 Subject Area 11 LAN WAN SUBSTATION SUPERVISION 113 588 7003 Supervise Installation of Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN Substation Distribution System eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeaees 3 137 113 588 7007 Supervise Troubleshooting of Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN Substation Distribution System eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteenteeeeeenaeees 3 139 Skill Level 3 Subject Area 12 CABLE AND EQUIPMENT INSPECTION 113 588 7001 Inspect Installation of AC DC Power Source for Communications Equipment 3 140 113 588 7002 Supervise Basic Safety in Cable Systems Installation eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaes 3 146 12 August 2008 iii STP 11 25L13 SM TG 113 588 7008 Inspect Installation of Cable Wire Systems 0 cecce
170. eing used a Connectors are designed specifically for the outside diameter of the cable to fit in the barrel of the connector shell and the inner contact diameter This relationship of the diameters and the dielectric between them will determine the characteristic impedance of the connector b Connectors are designed so that current flows through them unchanged Connectors are selected to match the RF cable that has the same impedance value maximum peak voltage rating and frequency limitations c Connectors employ either screw on or bayonet style couplings and can be crimp on or soldered 1 Crimping is normally used when speed of attachment is important or where it is impossible to solder Crimping requires a special crimp tool to install the connector to the cable Repair requires a new connector 2 Soldering requires a good soldered connection which requires tinning the connector and the use of flux Do not use acid flux on electronic parts or connections Do not overheat the connector or damage to the dielectric may occur 7 Assemble an RF connector These instructions are for the Trompeter 70 Series Wrench Crimp concentric Twinax connector using 250 Diameter Twinax cable but can generally be applied to other types of connector assemblies a Prepare the work area gather all the tools needed and heat the soldering iron to operating temperature 3 6 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps b Lay out th
171. eld red clip Adjust test set controls switches a Set transmitter controls switches b Set receiver controls switches Trace and mark cable path Determine cable depth Turn off test set Disconnect equipment a Disconnect transmitter b Disconnect receiver Performance Measures 1 2 3 4 5 O Tested batteries Isolated cable shield Installed ground rod Placed transmitter in proper location Attached transmitter clips to the ground rod black clip and to the cable shield red clip Adjusted test set controls switches Traced and mark cable path 3 110 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO GO 8 Determined cable depth 9 Turned off test set 10 Disconnected equipment Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 111 STP 11 25L13 SM TG LOCATE CABLE FAULTS USING A TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER TDR TEST SET 113 588 0021 Conditions Given a pre installed cable section a 1503 TDR paper pen pencil and Manufacture s Manual Note This task is performed during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather c
172. ent is achieved through the lifelong synthesis of the knowledge skills and experiences gained through institutional training and education organizational training operational experience and self development Commanders play the key roll in leader development that ideally produces tactically and technically competent confident and adaptive leaders who act with boldness and initiative in dynamic complex situations to execute mission type orders achieving the commander s intent d Training Responsibility Soldier and leader training and development continue in the unit Using the institutional foundation training in organizations and units focuses and hones individual and team skills and knowledge 1 Commander Responsibility a The unit commander is responsible for the wartime readiness of all elements in the formation The commander is therefore the primary trainer of the organization and is responsible for ensuring that all training is conducted in accordance with IAW the STP to the Army standard b Commanders ensure STP standards are met during all training If a Soldier fails to meet established standards for identified MOS tasks the Soldier must retrain until the tasks are performed to standard Training to standard on MOS tasks is more important than completion of a unit training event such as an ARTEP The objective is to focus on sustaining MOS proficiency this is the critical factor commanders must adhere to when trainin
173. entified with a circular label located on one of the module ends Identification codes are as follows S Standard Assembly R Reversed Assembly SD Standard Assembly with Dummy RD Reversed Assembly with Dummy Consult layout wiring diagram for proper location in assembly of battery system Assemblies can be rotated 180 degrees for proper polarity location m To anchor Absolyte batteries position module base assembly in desired location Mark floor through I beam holes and remove module base assembly Install anchoring devices and reposition module base assembly over anchors Check the assembly for level in both axes and level using the shims provided Torque nuts to 47 Newton Meters 35 feet pounds n The Absolyte battery system is supplied with a terminal plate assembly for the positive and negative terminations to provide the proper connection to the operating equipment and module terminals Do not connect load cables directly to module terminals it may compromise the battery system performance as well as the integrity of cell post seals 12 August 2008 3 17 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps o Cells may be connected and arranged in series parallel or series parallel to provide the correct voltage and current p All terminals interconnecting straps and bolts will be coated with NO OX ID grease at each terminating point q Mix acid and water to make electrolyte for the flooded cell battery 1 Prior to mixing electroly
174. er terminal O oa A W N Installed continuous feed pressure system Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 4 3 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL PARABOLIC ANTENNA 113 596 1024 Conditions Given an engineering scheme antenna materials antenna blueprint scheme tools and equipment listed in TM and safety equipment Note You will work under the supervision of a team crew chief Assistance is provided as required Standards Installed the parabolic antenna Performance Steps 1 Inventory equipment Install antenna feed assembly to antenna reflector Attach guy wires to feed horn assembly and antenna radome assembly Adjust guy wire cable tension Assemble and attach frame mount to back of antenna reflector Attach elevation adjusting rod assemble and secure azimuth adjusting rod Install radome on reflector Raise antenna to desired mounting position oOo oo N DO oO FP W ND Attach and secure antenna to support elements Note Torque to 39 foot pounds 10 Attach azimuth mounting brackets to support elements Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inventoried equipment Installed antenna feed a
175. erational or evacuated the defective equipment to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps 1 Ensure that DA Form 2404 is initiated Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Verify that routine checks on the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC have been performed 3 Verify that the power is on 4 Ensure that the BITE test is performed 5 Verify that DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 have been completed Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Ensured that DA Form 2404 was initiated 2 Verified that routine checks on the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC had been performed 3 Verified that the power was on 4 Ensured that the BITE test was performed 5 Verified that DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 had been completed Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 12 August 2008 3 133 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 10 TELEPHONE SETS SUPERVISION SUPERVISE INSTALLATION OF KY 68 113 600 7042 Conditions Given a cable team a digital subscriber voice terminal DSVT TSEC KY 68 telephone cable WF 16 U variable loading device battery BA 1372
176. erminations a Check for correct part use b Check terminating conductors for correct installation c Check for secure outlet connector d Check for cable test and ensure results are annotated correctly 4 Inspect cable termination in telecommunications closet a Check for appropriate slack b Check for termination of conductors on a 700 series MDF terminal c Check for cable test and ensure results are annotated correctly 5 Inspect cable testing a Review testing procedures b Review test result annotations for correctness Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected pre installation procedures 2 Inspected installation procedures 3 Inspected cable terminations 4 Inspected cable termination in telecommunications closet 5 Inspected cable testing 3 168 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passes Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show the Soldier what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 169 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT INSTALLATION OF COMMERCIAL FIBER OPTIC CABLE TERMINATORS CONNECTORS 113 632 9007 Conditions Given a section of fiber optic cable connectors ST SMA bi conical hot melt splicer s hand tools cleaving too
177. erwire unit COU to equipment being tested and remain in place while equipment is operating 3 Perform ULM Refer to TM 11 5805 703 14 a Check COU batteries for operational readiness b Check handset cradle handset grommet push to talk PTT switch and handset cable CAUTION Caution should be taken when connecting a COU to an operational cable system Minor errors might be produced causing interruption in data 4 Check COU operation with a pulse restorer Refer to TM 11 5805 703 14 5 Check COU operation with a remote multiplexer combiner RMC or remote loop group multiplexer RLGM Refer to TM 11 5805 703 14 6 Complete DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Initiated DA Form 2404 Performed routine checks Performed ULM a Checked COU operation with a pulse restorer Checked COU operation with an RMC or RLGM oa aA UU N Completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 12 August 2008 3 25 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 703 14 3 26 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG
178. es GO NO GO 1 Inspected splicing technique used 2 Inspected set up of work station and equipment according to splicing technique 3 Tested fiber optic cable for correct tolerance and operation 4 Checked for reestablishment of communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manual 12 August 2008 3 173 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT TROUBLESHOOTING OF LOCAL AREA NETWORK WIDE AREA NETWORK LAN WAN SUBSTATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 113 632 9013 Conditions Given a pre existing LAN or WAN substation distribution system ohmmeter spectrum analyzer Time Domain Reflectometer TDR loss test set power meter optical fault finder network documents and manufacturer s instruction booklets Standards Supervisor verified that faults were identified repaired and communications reestablished Performance Steps 1 O Oo N OQ O Inspect network type Information gathered using network documents Inspect that equipment is off to other networks Inspect testing of cable a Metallic cable use ohmmeter spectrum analyzer or TDR Inspect visually for missing terminations kinked cable blown fuses and loose connections 2
179. escription g Warnings Warnings alert users to the possibility of immediate personal injury or damage to equipment h Notes Notes provide a supportive explanation or hint that relates to the performance standards 12 August 2008 1 5 STP 11 25L13 SM TG 1 5 TRAINING EXECUTION All good training regardless of the specific collective leader and individual tasks being executed must comply with certain common requirements These include adequate preparation effective presentation and practice and thorough evaluation The execution of training includes preparation for training conduct of training and recovery from training a Preparation for Training Formal near term planning for training culminates with the publication of the unit training schedule Informal planning detailed coordination and preparation for executing the training continue until the training is performed Commanders and other trainers use training meetings to assign responsibility for preparation of all scheduled training Preparation for training includes selecting tasks to be trained planning the conduct of the training training the trainers reconnaissance of the site issuing the training execution plan and conducting rehearsals and pre execution checks Pre execution checks are preliminary actions commanders and trainers use to identify responsibility for these and other training support tasks They are used to monitor preparation activities and to follow up to
180. est on cable Connected coaxial cable from antenna to radio equipment Repressurized cable N O oO A W N Completed and submitted DA Form 2404 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 12 August 2008 4 41 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 4 42 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN PRESSURIZATION EQUIPMENT 113 596 4008 Conditions Given tools and test equipment mechanical dehydrator dehumidifier installed hand pump cylinder installed DA Form 2404 and DA Pam 750 8 Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours and should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Tested the pressurization equipment and the pressure held for 2 hours and recorded any uncorrected faults on DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Check low pressure alarm for defects 2 Check humidity assembly for defects 3 4 Check air tank drain valve for defects Check dehydrator for evidence of fungus WARNING Trichlorotrifluoroethane fumes are toxic Thorough ventilation should be provided whenever it is used It should NOT be used near an
181. establish communications Performance Steps 1 Install the TA 312 PT on a desk pole or tree 2 Set the selector switch for proper service 3 Connect the telephone cable to the TA 312 PT 4 Install the power source a Connect the external batteries when required b Install the batteries in telephone set Note PMs 4a and 5 may be used if the telephone operator must have his her hand free during operation 5 Connect the external headset when required Note Deicing the screen may be used to prevent the transmitter from icing during extreme cold weather 6 Install remove deicing screen when required 7 Establish communications Evaluation Preparation Setup Ensure that the telephone cable is laid Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier that he she must complete an outgoing call Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Installed the TA 312 PT on a desk pole or tree Set the selector switch for the proper service Connected the telephone cable to the TA 312 PT Installed the power source Connected the external headset when required Installed removed the deicing screen when required N O Oo A W DN Established communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until th
182. eteceteaeeeeeeeeeteees 3 39 113 588 1075 Install Underground Cable Splicing Equipment ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 3 41 113 588 1106 Install a Connector on a Stranded Flexible Coaxial Cable c sccceeeettteee 3 42 113 588 1107 Install Underground Cable System ee ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeaas 3 44 113 588 1108 Install a CAD 6 Buried Distribution Terminal 0 ceccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 46 113 588 3005 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Reel Unit RL 31 ceeeeeeetees 3 48 113 588 4022 Repair Plastic Sheathed Cable cccccceececcececeeeeeeeceenaeeeeeeeeesececnaeeeeeeeeeeenteee 3 49 113 588 8001 Perform Pole Rescue Operation cccccccccecsecceceeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeecciaeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 51 113 588 9008 Make a Coaxial Cable Splice c cccccccceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeesesecnueaeeeeeeeeeesenaees 3 53 113 632 5001 Troubleshoot Fiber Optic Transmission System FOTS Cable System 3 55 113 632 5002 Troubleshoot Fiber Optic Cable cccccceeceeceececeeeeeeeeeeceneaeeeeeeeeeseccaaeeeeeeeeeetees 3 57 Subject Area 3 MULTIPLEXERS 113 606 0105 Troubleshoot Multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC or Multiplexer Combiner TD AZS4 PY Craters tats ciceteetack ettnces speedy A E catides dy tadesaiduaeti see moat tented mentees 3 59 113 606 0106 Troubleshoot Line Termination Unit LTU CV 4180 0 0
183. eter four each B sealing tape B cord release compound socket 1 4 inch torque wrench DR tape splicer s scissors C cement splice case or lead sleeve sleeve spreader soldering torch or iron sandpaper Stearin flux tubing rack galvanized machine screws tubing straps pole or timber 8 foot galvanized pipe 1 1 4 inch 5 foot pipe straps and marker tags d Install contactor terminal Given aerial or underground contactor screwdriver 3 inch open end wrench 1 4 inch open end wrench 7 32 inch C pressure gauge splicer s headset battery 4 1 2 volt jumper cords and clips cylinder of nitrogen with regulator pipe joint compound C flange C valve stem file copper tubing elbow B pressure cell emery cloth drill set 3 8 inch nylon or lead screw anchors round head galvanized wood screws No 10 tubing cutter and small one hole straps e Install transducer terminal This task is performed on aerial and underground cable Given transducer O flange pipe joint compound F valve tie down plastic straps C gauge nitrogen cylinder lead marker tag wrench cord two conductor soap solution polyethylene cable solution bucket and brush and pressure regulator f Install continuous feed pressure system Given compressor dehydrator air dryer SAE 30 non detergent automotive or turbine oil soap solution bottled nitrogen gas if required appropriate tubing and fittings one hole clamps appropriate wood screws appropriate a
184. ey are done correctly 12 August 2008 3 71 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 201 12 3 72 Related 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL DIGITAL NONSECURE VOICE TERMINAL DNVT 113 600 1016 Conditions Given telephone cable WF 16 U or WD 1 TT DNVT TA 954 TT DNVT TA 1042A U tool equipment TE 33 screwdriver TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC TB 11 5805 780 15 TM 11 5805 735 12 TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Standards Installed the telephone set and established communications Performance Steps Refer to TM 11 5805 735 12 for TA 945 TT and TB 11 5805 780 15 for TA 1042A U for all performance steps unless otherwise indicated WARNING Voltage as high as 56V DC may be present on telephone cables To avoid injury only handle the telephone cables and binding posts to which telephone cables are attached by the insulated areas 1 Mount the DNVT 2 Make bit rate select change Note If the bit rate marked on the writing pad of the TA 954 TT or TA 1042A U is incorrect for a particular application it must be changed 3 Connect telephone cable 4 Turn on proper channel card on the TD 1233 P TTC or the TD 1234 P TTC Refer to TM 11 5805 706 12 or TM 11 5805 707 12 5 Establish communications Evaluation Preparation Set up Ensure the telephone cable is laid and connected to the switching equipment Prepare the DNVT for common battery mode of operation
185. f Determine the TRL Add the RVL and the RHL to get the TRL Example 25 7 16 24 2 16 49 9 16 is the TRL g Determine the total shrinkage of the run 12 August 2008 3 123 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 1 In the example there are two offset bends that result in shrinkage offsets A and B Using Table 9 1 to determine the shrinkage for each Example 1 3 4 3 8 or 6 16 shrinkage and 3 7 16 9 16 shrinkage 2 Add all the shrinkages OFFSET DEPTH SHRINKAGE A 1 12 16 6 16 B 3 7 16 9 16 6 16 9 16 15 16 Total Shrinkage 3 Add the total shrinkage to the TRL 49 9 16 TRL 15 16 shrinkage 49 24 16 h Determine the total gain of the run 1 Only 90 degree bends have gain and in this example there is one 90 degree bend 2 Subtract the gain from the previous total TRL 49 24 16 Gain of 2 10 16 47 14 16 or 47 7 8 inches This is the total length of the conduit run i Measure total length for back to back 90degree bends 1 The total length of back to back 90 degree bends is measured the same except 14 inches must be added to the RVL Refer back to the stub 90 degree the 2 inch constant and 5 inch bender take up comes to a total of 7 inches The two 90 degree bends therefore will require an additional 14 inches 7 7 14 2 Calculate all shrinkage and gains The formula for back to back 90 degree bends will then be RHL RVL 14 inches TRL Shrinkage Gain Final le
186. failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 3 32 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 5805 701 12 TM 11 5805 702 12 TM 11 5995 208 10 12 August 2008 3 33 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TROUBLESHOOT 26 PAIR CABLE CX 4566 G 113 588 0018 Conditions Given a faulty cable AN GTM 12 tools DA Form 2404 and TM 11 6625 3292 12 Standards Repaired the faults and reestablished communications Performance Steps Refer to TM 11 6625 3292 12 for all performance steps 1 Inspect the physical appearance of the cable a Breaks in cable where pairs might be showing so that possible weather conditions could damage and affect the performance 2 Perform troubleshooting procedures with the AN GTM 12 by testing the CX 4566 G 26 pair cable Note Perform the following three tests in the order stated 1 Continuity pairs CONT P 2 Insulation Resistance IR 3 Cross talk X TALK 3 Perform conductor continuity measurement Pair Test CAUTION To avoid damage to the test set or other equipment ensure that the first cable you intend to test is disconnected from any load power source or wiring Never use the AN GTM 12 to test a cable that is connected to anything other than an approved shorting block a Connect adapter cable W100 to connector J100 b Connect the cable
187. for stand alone splice b Measure and cut the conductors 6 inches from the edge of the box and strip off 2 inches of insulation c Cut a piece of wire long enough to allow the wire nut of each splice to be dressed on opposite sides of the box Strip 2 inches of insulation from each end d Using needle nose pliers place the conductors side by side lining up the edges of the insulation e Evenly trim the bare conductors to 2 inches and twist together with lineman pliers f Trim the splice to fit the proper sized wire nut g Treat the second splice the same as the first using the jumper conductor to link the two together h Dress splices and close the box c Identify the two methods of mounting electrical boxes 1 Surface mounted boxes are mounted to the surface of the wall 2 Flush mounted boxes are mounted flush with the surface of the wall 3 All boxes WILL be grounded d Terminate a conductor to a device 1 Measure and cut the conductor 6 inches from the edge of the box 2 Strip 2 inches of insulation from the end of the conductor 3 Make a 270 degree hook form a question mark on the wire to be terminated 4 Complete the termination by placing the conductor under the screw in a CLOCKWISE direction and tighten e Perform quality control checks on device terminations 1 Shiners bare wire cannot extend more than 1 16 of an inch past the termination and is measured from the base of the terminal or the head of
188. for Cable Assembly Special Purpose Electrical CX 11230 G 1 4 Mile NSN 5995 00 133 9126 CX 11230 G 100 Foot 5995 00 133 9127 CX 11230A G 1320 Foot 5995 01 121 6623 CX 11230A G 100 Foot 5995 01 125 6781 and CX 10734 G 5995 00 133 9125 7 November 1983 Operation Installation and Reference Data Operator Level for 2 1 2 Ton 6X6 M44A1 and M44A2 Series Trucks Multifuel Cargo M35A1 W O Winch NSN 2320 00 542 5633 W W 2320 00 542 5634 M35A2 W O Winch 2320 00 077 1616 W W 2320 00 077 1617 M35A2C W O Winch 2320 00 926 0873 W W 2320 00 926 0875 M36A2 W O Winch 2320 00 077 1618 W W 2320 00 077 1619 Tank Fuel M49A1C W O Winch 2320 00 440 3349 W W 2320 00 440 3346 M49A2C W O Winch 2320 00 077 1631 W W 2320 00 077 1632 Tank Water M50A1 W O Winch 2320 00 440 8307 W W 2320 00 440 8305 M50A2 W O Winch 2320 00 077 1633 W W 2320 00 077 1634 M50A3 W O Winch 2320 00 937 4036 W W 2320 00 937 5264 Van Shop M109A2 W O Winch 2320 00 440 8313 W W 2320 00 440 8308 M109A3 W O Winch 2320 00 077 1636 W W 2320 00 077 1637 Repair Shop M185A2 W O Winch 4940 00 987 8799 W W 4940 00 987 8800 M185A3 W O Winch 4940 00 077 1638 W W 4940 00 077 1639 Tractor M275A1 W O Winch 2320 00 446 2479 M257A2 W O Winch 2320 00 077 1640 W W 2320 00 077 1641 Dump M342A2 W O Winch 2320 00 077 1643 W W 2320 00 077 1644 Maintenance Pipeline Construction M756A2 W W 2320 00 904 3277
189. frays and cracks b Check climbing sleeve bearing c Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d e Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Maintain guyed supported tower oaoaoogog CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before work is performed on the tower Check tower for loose hardware Check tower for rust Inspect tower footing for loose hardware Check to ensure that tower is plumb tension guys as required Check tower ground for corrosion and loose hardware Note Reconnect radio equipment f Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Maintain tower 4 34 mee a o E o e oe Check area around support timbers and base plates for proper drainage Check tower section AB 208 U for leveling Check for loose anchors Check take up winch Check guy wire attachment Check guy tension Check for clogged drain holes in the vertical and horizontal tower members Check tower for bent damaged or missing braces Check ground rods Lubricate davit assembly snatch block and capstan 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps k Paint tower as needed Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 m Lubricate davit assembly snatch block
190. g and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related The National Electric Code NEC 12 August 2008 3 125 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Skill Level 2 Subject Area 9 CABLE AND EQUIPMENT SUPERVISION SUPERVISE RECOVERY OF CABLE WIRE SYSTEMS 113 588 7005 Conditions Given a telephone cable or wire line pre installed reel unit RL 31 can be vehicle mounted empty reel tool equipment TE 33 gloves an assistant as required and TC 24 20 Standards Supervised the recovery the telephone cable or wire Performance Steps Refer to TC 24 20 for all performance steps 1 Coordinate disconnection of telephone cable from terminal equipment 2 Verify removal of all wire tags and position line along the side of the recovery route 3 Supervise the removal of cable from all aerial constructions 4 Ensure removal of buried wire 5 Supervise the recovery of telephone cable Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Coordinated disconnection of telephone cable from terminal equipment 2 Verified removal of all wire tags and positioned line along the side of the recovery route 3 Supervised the removal of cable from all aerial constructions 4 Ensured removal of buried wire 5 Supervised the recovery of telephone cable Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM
191. g individual Soldiers units 2 NCO Responsibility a A great strength of the US Army is its professional NCO Corps who takes pride in being responsible for the individual training of Soldiers crews and small teams The NCO support channel parallels and complements the chain of command It is a channel of communication and supervision from the Command Sergeant Major CSM to the First Sergeants 1SGs and then to other NCOs and enlisted personnel NCOs train Soldiers to the non negotiable standards published in STPs Commanders delegate authority to NCOs in the support channel as the primary trainers of individual crew and small team training Commanders hold NCOs responsible for conducting standards based performance oriented battle focused training and providing feedback on individual crew and team proficiency Commanders define responsibilities and authority of their NCOs to their staffs and subordinates 12 August 2008 1 3 STP 11 25L13 SM TG b NCOs continue the Soldierization process of newly assigned enlisted Soldiers and begin their professional development NCOs are responsible for conducting standards based performance oriented battle focused training They identify specific individual crew and small team tasks that support the unit s collective mission essential tasks plan prepare rehearse and execute training and evaluate training and conduct after action reviews AARs to provide feedback to the commander on indi
192. ground loops 2 Twinax is limited to approximately 15 MHz since it has high transmission losses above this range Twinax is used in analog and digital signal transmission c Triax is an RF cable with an additional outer copper braid that acts as a shield to protect the enclosed conductors It normally has a yellow jacket 1 Triax is improved because the outer copper braid is grounded which protects the signal from noise improving the signal to noise ratio 2 Triax cable can be used as ungrounded coaxial cable d Quadrax is an RF cable that has a balanced twisted pair with two separate insulated braids over the center conductors It normally has an orange jacket 1 In some applications the inner braid can be used for direct current DC control voltages Quadrax cable can also be used to provide additional EMI suppression by connecting both shields to earth ground at one point if separate equipment ground is not available 2 Quadrax shields can be ungrounded to provide ground loop isolation 4 Identify the general installation procedures for RF cable There are many methods and procedures used to install RF cable For specific types refer to the manufacturer s specifications a Separation of cable Separate cables a distance twice the diameter of the largest cable to avoid interference To minimize interference separate RF cables from power and ground plus separate low power RF cables from high power RF cables b Temperat
193. h mounting bar is toward the growing end of the frame 4 Install the guardrail supports and the front rear and end guardrails 5 After the entire framework has been installed tighten all nuts and bolts and retouch any portion of the framework where the paint has been marred e Install terminal blocks Components of a terminal block are the fanning mounting and clamping strips 1 Vertical terminal block The left side of a vertical block is the cable or permanent side The right side is the temporary or maintenance side Pin count is from front to back and rows are counted from top to bottom 2 Horizontal terminal block The top of a horizontal block is the temporary or maintenance side and the bottom of the block is the cable or permanent side Pin count is from front to back and rows are counted left to right 4 Identify types of distribution frames a The MDF 1 The purpose and function of the MDF is to enable the greater part of the wiring in a dial central office to be permanent 2 The MDF is generally located directly above the cable vault or near an outside frame 3 The vertical side of an MDF terminates the outside cable from the cable vault The vertical side of the MDF has protector blocks which provide electrical protection and termination points for cross connects Verticals on an MDF are counted from the permanent end to the growing end and start with the number 1 The protector blocks are identified by cable
194. h new reel cable is placed in service 2 Before terminating to equipment b Ensure all test are within tolerance 6 Inspect established communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected the pre installation checks on the cable and wire system 2 Inspected the installation of surface cable wire 3 Inspected the installation of aerial cable wire road crossing 4 Inspected the installed buried cable wire crossing 12 August 2008 3 147 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO GO 5 Inspected operational test results 6 Inspected established communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related AR 25 2 TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 5805 201 12 Manufacturer s Manuals 3 148 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT RECOVERY OF CABLE WIRE SYSTEMS 113 588 7009 Conditions Given a reeling machine RL 207 G vehicle mounted tool equipment TE 21 tool equipment TE 33 field wire field cable CX 11230 A G pre installed reels RC 453 G reel equipment RL 31 CE 11 empty telephone test set hammer HM 1 shovel gloves eye protection cargo truck M 1078 2 1 2 ton light medium tactical vehicle TC 24 20 TM 11 5995 208 10
195. hat feeds the single throw switch or a switching network This will be an in the middle splice used to connect these conductors 4 The silver terminal screw D is used to terminate the neutral white or gray insulated conductor This conductor originates at the neutral buss bar or a splice from a previous outlet 5 There must be NO Tab E at this location A tab would cause a direct short between terminals D and F on the receptacle 6 The brass terminal screw F is used to terminate the unswitched L 2 black insulated conductor This conductor originates at a circuit breaker a double throw switch or a splice of a previous outlet This conductor must be identified as L 2 7 Green terminal screw G is used to terminate the ground green insulated conductor This conductor originates at the ground buss bar or a splice from a previous outlet 8 The in the middle splice will be used in thru box wiring for each conductor When splicing the ground conductor refer to the grounding rules m Wiring a 120 V AC basic incandescent light fixture switched or unswitched 1 The brass terminal screw A is used to terminate the black insulated conductor This conductor originates at a circuit breaker a single throw switch a switching network or a splice 2 The silver terminal screw B is used to terminate the neutral white or gray insulated conductor This conductor originates at the neutral buss bar or a splice 3 Th
196. he Army standard 2 An AAR is immediately conducted and may result in the need for additional training Any task that was not conducted to standard should be retrained Retraining should be conducted at the earliest opportunity Commanders should program time and other resources for retraining as an integral part of their training plan Training is incomplete until the task is trained to standard Soldiers will remember the standard enforced not the one discussed c Recovery from Training The recovery process is an extension of training and once completed it signifies the end of the training event At a minimum recovery includes conduct of maintenance training turn in of training support items and the conduct of AARs that review the overall effectiveness of the training just completed 1 Maintenance training is the conduct of post operations preventive maintenance checks and services PMCS accountability of organizational and individual equipment and final inspections Class IV Class V Training Aids Devices Simulators and Simulations TADSS and other support items are maintained accounted for and turned in and training sites and facilities are closed out 2 AARs conducted during recovery focus on collective leader and individual task performance and on the planning preparation and conduct of the training just completed Unit AARs focus on individual and collective task performance and identify shortcomings and the training
197. he slotted insulator Sweat solder the pin to the conductor through the inspection hole Use plenty of flux to avoid a cold solder joint Do not get solder on the outside of the pin and do not overheat p Place the pin dielectric over the center pin q Place the inner shield outer conductor over the assembly Align one of the slots in the shield with the secondary conductor Wrap the secondary conductor CLOCKWISE around the base inside the grove of the inner shield Cut the conductor at approximately 270 degrees around the shield The secondary conductor must not be above the rim of the grove in the shield Sweat solder the secondary conductor to the shield in two places Solder the end of the conductor and a point opposite Do not allow solder to enter the slots of the inner shield or it will short the primary and secondary conductors s Place the body of the connector over the assembly slide the clamp nut up to the body and thread the clamp nut into the connector body Use a thin wrench such as Trompeter wrench on the body and a suitable wrench adjustable or open end on the clamp nut to tighten the connector Turn the clamp nut to tighten hold the body and cable stationary while turning the nut Do not over tighten u Visually inspect the connector Conduct a continuity test to see if any of the conductors or the shield is shorted When the opposite end of the cable is finished test the cable with an appropriate RF or bit error r
198. heck electron tube D2DAanqgnoay 4 32 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps f Adjust timer beacon as required g Lubricate shaft bearing and cam Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected tower safety devices 2 Maintained antenna 3 Inspected ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 12 August 2008 4 33 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN AB 216 U TOWER 113 596 3018 Conditions Given tower AB 216 U installed carrier rail installed ground obstruction marker installed screwdriver set pliers adjustable wrench open end wrench knife level tape measure tension meters engineers transit block and tackle safety equipment tool equipment TE 87 tool equipment TE 21 DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 and the antenna safety manual Note This task is performed during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Corrected the fault inspected and lubricated the tower and completed DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Inspect tower safety devices a Check climbing belts for cuts
199. hey are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 4 18 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN ROTATABLE LOG PERIODIC ANTENNA 113 596 3010 Conditions Given a rotatable log periodic antenna installed variable standing wave ration VSWR testing equipment multimeter safety equipment tool kit TK 115 G tool equipment TE 33 block and tackle engineers transit open end wrenches DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 and the antenna safety manual Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Inspected the antenna lubricated the gearbox fittings performed the VSWR test and completed DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Inspect tower safety devices a Check climbing belts for cuts frays and cracks b Check climbing sleeve bearing c Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension e Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Maintain guyed supported tower CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before work is performed on the tower Check tower for loose hardware Check tower for rust Inspect tower footing for loose hardware Check to ensure that tower is plumb tension guys a
200. ide access pull points for easy installation splices taps or removal of cable c They are used to connect sections of conduit and are required for every 360 degrees of bend d The covers are either clamp on or are held in place with screws e Elbow L bodies are used to make 90 degree turns to determine the type hold the body by the short hub as you would a pistol and look at the large opening The four types of conduit bodies are 1 LL Open on the left 2 LR Open on the right 3 LB Open on the back 4 L Open on both sides f Tee T type conduit bodies There are two types used to extend a vertical conduit run from a horizontal run 1 T Opening is 90 degrees top from the short hub 2 TB The opening is 180 degrees opposite or back from the short hub 7 Identify utility boxes a These boxes are used in conduit runs to house electrical devices such as switches outlets or as junction boxes b They are normally made of sheet metal and come in a variety of sizes and shapes 1 Square boxes 4 X 4 are used as junction boxes single or double gang switch outlet boxes and come with or without knockouts for various sizes of conduit 2 Handy boxes 2 X 4 are used as switch boxes outlet boxes or pull points and come with or without knockouts 3 Octagon boxes come in various sizes are used to mount light fixtures switches outlets junction boxes and come with or without knockouts c Uti
201. idered before cable and connector components are selected 1 Frequency Although primarily designed for RFs video and LANs some systems use coaxial cable for digital transmission 2 Power level peak voltage Coaxial cable can support higher frequencies point to point wiring and has the flexibility and economy for many systems 3 Losses and degradation Losses and degradation can include reflected signals signal attenuation phase delay and other impairments d Identify elements of an RF cable 1 Center conductor a Flexible and semirigid cables use solid or stranded copper wire copper braid wire or a tubular copper conductor It can be made of copper clad steel silver high temp and tin or nickel plated Other materials such as aluminum and Nichrome are also used for special purpose cables b Rigid cables can have a center conductor similar to those used in flexible and semirigid however special purpose rigid cables are have a center conductor that is constructed from non flexible materials requiring special procedures for handling and installation 2 The dielectric is used to physically and electrically separate the center conductor from the outer conductor Dielectric materials may be solid semisolid or tape wrapped around the center conductor Dielectric materials used are a Air Used primarily in certain size flexible and semiflexible cables b Polyethylene Used mostly where temperatures will not excee
202. ified that the KY 68 was getting power Supervised troubleshooting the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system Ensured malfunction s were identified Ensured corrective actions were taken O a A W N Supervised the reestablishment of communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 12 August 2008 3 135 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required TM 11 5810 329 10 TM 11 5820 864 12 1 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 TM 11 5820 931 12 1 3 136 Related AR 380 40 DA Pam 25 380 2 TB 380 41 TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 11 LAN WAN SUBSTATION SUPERVISION SUPERVISE INSTALLATION OF LOCAL AREA NETWORK WIDE AREA NETWORK LAN WAN SUBSTATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 113 588 7003 Conditions Given a minimum of two computers network interface cards NICs Ethernet cables 802 3 10 base 2 or 10 base T a communications software package with software reference manuals approved user code and or password as required transceiver router established plan layout and user request Standards Supervised the installation of a LAN WAN and that data can be sent and received between system computers Performance Steps 1 Supervi
203. ing in contact with power lines or power attachments 1 Check pole for defect 2 Check suspension strand for tension Refer to FM 11 373 1 3 Climb pole if required Refer to TC 24 20 WARNING Installer should look both up and down at all times while climbing a pole This will protect him from climbing into attachments on the pole and from climbing over the top of the pole Installer should visually check to ensure that the snap engages the D ring Installer should NOT depend on the sound of the keeper snapping to indicate that the snap hook has engaged 4 Set up ladder if required WARNING Installer should NOT move the foot of the ladder after the ladder is lashed to the strand 5 Remove aerial cable rings or lashing wire if required 6 Terminate cable lashing wire 12 August 2008 3 39 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 7 Make proper slack in cable using the slack puller WARNING Installer should NOT use the slack puller on a rusty pitted strand Such a strand is likely to be broken by the slack puller Installer should substitute a chain hoist equipped with strand grips for the puller 8 Set up other splicing equipment if required Refer to FM 11 372 1 a Splicing platform b Splicer s tent c Cable car d Splicer s umbrella Note An aerial handline should be used when setting up splicing equipment Evaluation Preparation Setup None Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier that
204. ing wave ratio VSWR testing equipment signal generator block and tackle set safety equipment 6 inch adjustable wrench common pliers tool equipment TE 21 DA Form 2404 and DA Pam 750 8 Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Corrected the fault performed the VSWR and the TDR test and completed DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Inspect tower safety devices a Check climbing belts for cuts frays and cracks b Check climbing sleeve bearing c Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension 2 Maintain antenna CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before any work is performed on the antenna a Check antenna element for looseness or bends b Check elements for deterioration c Check connector for corrosion Note Reconnect radio equipment d Perform TDR test e Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Inspect ground obstruction marker WARNING Do NOT damage the load contact relay when the relay contacts are cleaned Inspect obstruction lamps Check all interconnecting cables and connectors for cracks and breaks Check control assembly Clean obstruction components C
205. ion and aids in heat transfer 12 August 2008 3 83 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 4 Identify soldering aids a A soldering fork is used to form wires b A soldering iron holder is used for safety temperature control and convenience When not in use the iron should be kept in a holder with its tip clean and coated with a small amount of solder c The solder bag is used for protection from solder splash and serves as a receptacle for debris which helps keep the work area clean d Adamp sponge is used to remove excess solder from the iron tip and help keep it clean 5 Make a solder connection a Solder shall be applied to the connection when the temperature reaches the point where solder will readily melt b The connection shall have a smooth bright appearance with solder covering the top of the conductor and a concave slope flowing down between the terminal and the lower half of the conductor c Identify unacceptable soldered connections faults 1 There will be no solder on the opposite side of the pin unless it has been indicated that both sides are to be soldered 2 The insulation of the wire should not be burned and should not be in the soldered connection 3 Too much solder can cover faults which may not make a good connection 4 Not enough solder 5 No spikes on the solder 6 Let the soldered connection cool naturally or a cold solder connection may occur 6 Identify methods of solderi
206. ion marker 12 August 2008 4 7 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual 4 8 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL PRESSURIZED TRANSMISSION LINES 113 596 1040 Conditions Given an engineering scheme tools and equipment pressurization material and required safety equipment Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Installed the appropriate pressurization system purged the line and pressurized the cable Performance Steps 1 Install mechanical dehydrator dehumidifier Install dehydration pump system Install dehydration nitrogen system for single transmission line Install dehydration nitrogen system for multiple transmission line Purge cable line O oa A W N Pressurize cable Note If cable does NOT maintain correct air pressure use soap bucket and brush and make a soapy solution and spread it around connections and fittings to locate air leaks Check connections and fittings for looseness or damage Replace as necessary Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 I
207. irectional setting on the parabolic antenna reset as required c Check feed assembly for dents or broken parts Note Reconnect the radio equipment d Perform VSWR test e Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Inspect ground obstruction marker WARNING Do NOT damage the load contact relay when the relay contacts are cleaned Inspect obstruction lamps Check all interconnecting cables and connectors for cracks and breaks Check control assembly Clean obstruction components Check electron tube Dango 4 30 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps f Adjust timer beacon as required g Lubricate shaft bearing and cam Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected tower safety devices 2 Maintained antenna 3 Inspected ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 12 August 2008 4 31 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN YAGI ANTENNA 113 596 3016 Conditions Given a Yagi antenna installed carrier rail installed ground obstruction marker installed screwdriver set open end wrench knife level tape measure variable stand
208. is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 5995 208 10 3 126 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE TROUBLESHOOTING OF CABLE WIRE SYSTEMS 113 588 7006 Conditions Given an individual s a telephone cable or wire line pre installed reel unit RL 31 can be vehicle mounted tool equipment TE 33 gloves test equipment assistant as required and TC 24 20 Standards Supervised troubleshooting the cable wire system identifying the problem correcting the fault s and reestablishing communications Performance Steps 1 Verify that trouble exists 2 Supervise troubleshooting the cable wire system 3 Ensure malfunction s are identified 4 Ensure corrective actions are taken 5 Supervise the reestablishment of communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified that the trouble exists 2 Supervised troubleshooting the cable wire system 3 Ensured malfunction s are identified 4 Ensured corrective actions are taken 5 Supervised the reestablishment of communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform
209. is used to terminate the switched conductor 2 Check that the TAB is broken 3 Check that the other brass terminal screw is used to terminate the unswitched insulated conductor 4 Check that the silver terminal screw is used to terminate the neutral insulated conductor 5 Check that there is NO tab at the silver terminal screw 6 Check that the brass terminal screw is used to terminate the unswitched insulated conductor 7 Check that the green terminal screw is used to terminate the ground insulated conductor 12 Inspect the dress and terminate conductors in a distribution panel a Check that the conductors are routed in the most direct path 1 Check that feeder paths are never crossed with branch circuit conductors 2 Check that conductors are dressed to the back of the panel 12 August 2008 3 143 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 Check that when conductor reaches the termination point it is bent 90 degrees to lift the conductor from the back of the panel toward the termination point 13 Inspect that the distribution panel is correctly labeled 14 Inspect for evidence that AC safety measures were used during installation 15 Inspect DC power a Check DC power components for correctness 1 Check that each rectifier charger has the capacity to assume full load if one fails 2 Check for correct inverters 3 Check the station battery bank if available for correct filters for removing AC component
210. ividual training program It includes doctrinal principles and implications outlined in FM 7 0 Based on these guidelines commanders and unit trainers must tailor the information to meet the requirements for their specific unit 1 2 TRAINING EQUIPMENT Every Soldier noncommissioned officer NCO warrant officer and officer has one primary mission to be trained and ready to fight and win our nation s wars Success in battle does not happen by accident it is a direct result of tough realistic and challenging training a Operational Environment 1 Commanders and leaders at all levels must conduct training with respect to a wide variety of operational missions across the full spectrum of operations these operations may include combined arms joint multinational and interagency considerations and span the entire breadth of terrain and environmental possibilities Commanders must strive to set the daily training conditions as closely as possible to those expected for actual operations 2 The operational missions of the Army include not only war but also military operations other than war MOOTW Operations may be conducted as major combat operations a small scale contingency or a peacetime military engagement Offensive and defensive operations normally dominate military operations in war along with some small scale contingencies Stability operations and support operations dominate in MOOTW Commanders at all echelons may combine diffe
211. k 90 degree bend is two adjacent 90 degree bends that are bent as described above If one of the bends is a stub 90 degrees make it first 16 Measure conduit runs a The installer should determine the total length of the conduit run before making any bends The total length is the distance of the run plus any shrinkage and minus any gains b The formula for measuring conduit for a particular run is Rough Horizontal Length RHL Rough Vertical Length RVL Total Rough Length TRL Shrinkage Gain Final length c All measurements are made on the outside of the conduit run Fractions will be calculated to a 16th of an inch until the final length is determined d Determine the RHL 1 Measure from the outside of the utility box to a horizontal reference point Example 17 8 16 from the wall 2 Measure from the outside edge of the run to the same reference point Example 42 15 16 from the wall 3 Subtract the smaller from the larger measurement to get the RHL Example 42 15 16 17 8 16 25 7 16 is the RHL e Determine the RVL 1 Measure from the top of the last utility box to a vertical reference point Example 36 6 16 from the ceiling 2 Measure from the top outside of the horizontal part of the run to the same reference point Example 12 4 16 from the ceiling 3 Subtract the smaller measurement from the larger to get the RVL Example 36 6 16 12 4 16 24 2 16 is the RVL
212. keys 3 Enter and verify initialization displays a Initialize position b Initialize time and date c Initialize track and ground speed d Initialize user defined datum page 1 if necessary e Initialize user defined datum page 2 if necessary f Initialize crypto key if necessary 4 Enter edit or review waypoint data a Copy waypoints b Determine distance between waypoints c Calculate a new waypoint d Clear waypoints e Define a mission route 12 August 2008 3 1 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Check status displays to ensure acquisition of four satellites 6 Navigate to five waypoints Evaluation Preparation Setup For this evaluation prepare equipment and ensure equipment is operational Provide sufficient initialization setup and waypoint data information to the Soldier so that the PLGR can be used to navigate Prepare a navigation course Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier all performance measures PMs must be accomplished within 60 minutes Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Entered or verified correct setup displays Entered crypto keys Entered and verified initialization displays Entered edited or reviewed waypoint data Checked status displays to ensure acquisition of four satellites O a A W N Navigated to five waypoints Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO
213. l Maintenance ULM on Test Sets Ww ww wo wo BNCOC AN BNCOC AN BNCOC AN Plan a Telephone Cable Line Inspect Existing Cable Lines 2 5 STP 11 25L13 SM TG CRITICAL TASKS Task Number Training Location 113 588 6007 Prepare a Detailed Cable Route Map BNCOC SA 113 588 7075 Inspect Poles UNIT SA Subject Area 13 Telephone Maintenance Truck Inspection 113 588 7108 Inspect Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services PMCS UNIT AN 3 of Telephone Maintenance Truck Subject Area 14 Telephone Sets Inspection 113 600 7045 Inspect Installation of KY 68 113 600 7046 Inspect Troubleshooting of KY 68 Subject Area 15 Multiplexer Inspection 113 606 7029 Inspect Installation of Multiplexers 113 606 7030 Inspect Troubleshooting of Multiplexers 113 606 7031 Inspect Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Multiplexers Subject Area 16 LAN WAN Substation Inspection 113 613 4003 113 632 7002 Verify Engineering Installation Package EIP Inspect Installation of Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN Substation Distribution System Inspect Installation of Commercial Fiber Optic Cable Terminators Connectors Inspect Repair of Fiber Optic Cable Assembly FOCA CX 13295 G Inspect Splicing of Commercial Fiber Optic Cable 113 632 9007 113 632 9010 113 632 9011 113 632 9013 Inspect Troubleshooting of Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN Substation Distributio
214. lated proper pole depth Checked poles for defects Checked guy wires and anchor O oa A W N Recorded information from inspections and preserved it as permanent record Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 159 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 13 TELEPHONE MAINTENANCE TRUCK INSPECTION INSPECT PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES PMCS OF TELEPHONE MAINTENANCE TRUCK 113 588 7108 Conditions Given utility telephone maintenance truck DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 a Soldier performing PMCS and TM 9 2320 269 10 Standards Inspector observed PMCS performance and annotated on DA Form 2404 if required Performance Steps 1 Review license of the operator 2 Ensure TM 9 2320 269 10 DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 are available 3 Observe actual PMCS performances by the operator 4 Inspect DA Form 2404 for operator entries 5 Sign DA Form 2404 if fault actually exists Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Reviewed license of the operator 2 Ensured TM 9 2320 269 10 DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 were available 3 Observed actual PMCS performances b
215. lay material over the map area to be annotated Secured material to the map Registered the material to the map Plotted the position of the terminals using authorized military symbols Plotted line routes and construction symbols Entered marginal information Turned into company operations Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related FM 1 02 FM 24 1 FM 3 25 26 TC 24 20 3 158 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT POLES 113 588 7075 Conditions Given a notebook pencil flat tip screwdriver 2 pound hammer lag wrench pole and shovel Standards Verified the pole as sound or notified operations of the requirement for replacement Performance Steps 1 Visually inspect the pole a Obvious rot b Cracks c Broken hardware 2 Inspect poles below ground 3 Calculate proper pole depth 4 Check poles for defects a Hollow hearts b Internal rot c Exposed pockets 5 Check guy wires and anchor 6 Record information from inspections and preserve it as permanent record Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected the pole visually Inspected poles below ground Calcu
216. ldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 3895 202 13 TM 11 5805 201 12 TM 11 5995 208 10 3 128 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE SPLICING OF COMMERCIAL FIBER OPTIC CABLE 113 632 9014 Conditions Given a cable team section of fiber optic cable splicer s hand tools cleaving tools polishing adapter reagent alcohol microscope mechanical splice workstation equipment Norland optical adhesive Fiberlok 2501 assembly tool fiber optic fusion splicer safety glasses and manufacture instructional manuals Standards Detected a failure isolated and restored to an operational state Performance Steps 1 Verify that the trouble exists 2 Supervise troubleshooting the fiber cable in accordance with the user manual 3 Ensure malfunction s are identified 4 Ensure corrective actions are taken 5 Supervise the reestablishment of communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified that the trouble exists 2 Supervised troubleshooting the fiber cable in accordance with the user manual 3 Ensured malfunction s are identified 4 Ensured corrective actions are taken 5 Supervised the reestablishment of communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if
217. ldier tasks Use TG to relate tasks to METL Conduct training assessment Use TG to define what Soldier tasks to assess Determine training objectives Use TG to set objectives Determine strategy plan for training Use TG to relate Soldier tasks to strategy Conduct pre execution checks Use SM task summary as source for task performance Execute training conduct AAR Use SM task summary as source for task performance Evaluate training against established standards Use SM task summary as standard for evaluation Figure 1 2 Relationship of Battle Focused Training and STP 1 4 TASK SUMMARY FORMAT Task summaries outline the wartime performance requirements of each critical task in the SM They provide the Soldier and the trainer with the information necessary to prepare conduct and evaluate critical task training As a minimum task summaries include information the Soldier must know and the skills that he must perform to standards for each task The format of the task summaries included in this SM is as follows a Task Number A 10 digit number identifies each task or skill This task number along with the task title must be included in any correspondence pertaining to the task b Task Title The task title identifies the action to be performed c Conditions The task conditions identify all the equipment tools references job aids and supporting personnel that the Soldier needs to use to perform the task in wartime This section identifies a
218. led If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 FM 11 487 25 12 August 2008 4 29 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN PARABOLIC ANTENNA 113 596 3015 Conditions Given parabolic antenna installed carrier rail installed ground obstruction marker installed screwdriver set adjustable wrench open end wrench knife level tape measure binoculars field type VSWR testing equipment safety equipment common pliers tool equipment TE 87 U DA Form 2404 and DA Pam 750 8 Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Corrected the faults checked the directional setting performed the VSWR test and completed DA Form 2404 Performance Steps CAUTION The radio equipment must be disconnected before any work is performed on the antenna 1 Inspect tower safety devices a Check climbing belts for cuts frays and cracks b Check climbing sleeve bearing c Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension 2 Maintain antenna a Check parabolic antenna reflector b Check d
219. lity box covers come in three types blank switch and outlet d Cast boxes are made of cast iron or aluminum and are used for electrical devices in areas where electrical magnetic protection EMP EMI or RFI shielding is needed or in areas where weather protection is required 1 The access holes are threaded to accept rigid conduit or an EMT box connector 2 The three types of cast box covers blank switch and outlet have rubber gaskets to provide a watertight seal 8 Install conduit boxes and bodies a Boxes can be mounted with the box cover flush with the surface or with the box exposed b Conduit bodies must be rigidly supported by the attached conduit c All unused openings must be closed and a cover must be used on all utility boxes after the wiring has been installed and verified 9 Identify conduit couplings a Threaded couplings are used only with rigid conduit to connect lengths together b Threadless couplings join conduit lengths by compression rings or setscrews 12 August 2008 3 119 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 1 Install the compression ring coupling by placing a gland nut then a compression ring over the end of each piece of tubing Place a threaded coupling over the end of one section then place the second section into the coupling Tighten each section s gland nut to squeeze the compression rings and lock the two sections together 2 Install the setscrew type by inserting each section of cond
220. ll Level Column This column lists the skill levels of the MOS for which Soldiers must receive sustainment training to ensure they maintain proficiency to Soldier s manual standards 2 2 SUBJECT AREA CODES Skill Level 1 1 Navigate 2 Cable and Equipment 3 Multiplexers 4 Telephone Sets 5 Telephone Maintenance Truck 6 Local Area Network LAN Wide Area Network WAN Substation 7 Communications Security COMSEC 8 Conduit Skill Level 2 9 Cable and Equipment Supervision 10 Telephone Sets Supervision 11 LAN WAN Substation Supervision Skill Level 3 12 Cable and Equipment Inspection 13 Telephone Maintenance Truck Inspection 14 Telephone Sets Inspection 15 Multiplexer Inspection 16 LAN WAN Substation Inspection 17 Computer Technology 18 Navigation 19 Mobile Subscriber Equipment MSE 20 Antenna Installation 12 August 2008 2 3 CRITICAL TASK LIST MOS TRAINING PLAN 25L13 CRITICAL TASKS STP 11 25L13 SM TG Task Number Title Training Sust Sust Location Tng Tng SL Freq Skill Level 1 Subject Area 1 Navigate 113 610 2044 Navigate Using the AN PSN 11 AIT SA 1 3 Subject Area 2 Cable and Equipment 113 588 2002 Perform Cable Marking Procedures AIT AN 1 3 113 588 2003 Install Connectors on Copper Cable AIT AN 1 3 113 588 2004 Perform a Splice on a Plastic Sheath Plastic Insulated Cable AIT AN 1 3 113 588 2005 Install AC DC Power Source for Communications Equipment UNIT AN 1 3 113 588 2006 Install Cable Wi
221. ll PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 6625 3292 12 12 August 2008 3 27 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON TEST SET TS 4117 G 113 574 3011 Conditions Given test set TS 4117 G with battery pencil DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 and TM 11 6625 3227 138P Standards Performed ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the test set was operational or evacuated the defective test set to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps Refer to TM 11 6625 3227 13 amp P for performance steps 2 through 11 1 oO ON O a A W N 10 11 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Perform routine checks Check for loose nuts bolts and screws Check transit case Check handset Check reference cable assembly Check fiber optic loopback connector Check switch actuator assembly Check case top O ring Check front panel OSM display Nameplate Maintenance orderwire MOW connector Battery cover Audible alarm Fiber Optic Cable Assembly FOCA test facility FTF connector MOW communications facility MCF connector Dust covers and lanyards INA 90DA00fM Check ba
222. lled hole 12 August 2008 3 95 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Hold the attachment against the mounting surface and pull the bolt outward holding the toggle against the inside bearing surface and tightening the bolt by hand until flush with the mounting surface You should be able to tighten the bolt without the toggle turning Do not over tighten The toggle will need to be shifted to center before tightening fully j Crimp type or molly screw anchors 1 Drill a hole the same size as the outside diameter of the anchor 2 Thread the anchor onto the mounting screw then insert the anchor into the mounting hole and tighten to expand the anchor holding it in place 3 Once the anchor is installed the mounting screw can be removed without disturbing the anchor and mounting fixture can be attached The crimp type anchors have less strength than toggle bolts when subjected to a pulling force from the wall Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Located hole for drilling 2 Drilled holes in masonry or concrete 3 Installed various types of anchors Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 3 96 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM
223. lock or 4 pin connector flat tip or Phillips screwdriver snips and pliers TL 13A DA Pam 25 16 and the Manufacture s Manual Standards Programmed and installed the STE telephone and established communications Performance Steps 1 Identify location requirements 2 Install cord connections a Handset connection b Terminal connection c Telephone line connection 3 Install power connector 4 Install software configuration in accordance with the manufacture s manual 5 Establish communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified location requirements 2 Installed cord connections 3 Installed power connector 4 Installed software configuration in accordance with the manufacture s manual 5 Established communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Pam 25 16 Manufacture s Manual 3 68 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL VOICE OVER INTERNET PROTOCOL VOIP TELEPHONE 113 628 1001 Conditions Given CAT V cable crimper two RJ 45 connectors Cisco VoIP phone and internet protocol IP phone case Standards Installed the telephone set and established communications Performance Ste
224. lored screw is used for NEUTRAL c The GREEN colored screw is used for GROUND 12 August 2008 3 141 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps c Inspect switches 1 Check general use switches for correct operation 2 Check single throw switches for correct operation 3 Check three way switches for correct operation 4 Check four way switches for correct operation Used with three way switches to provide additional control point 5 Check double throw switches for correct operation Usually located at or near the entry panel to control power source or polarity changes d Inspect that incandescent light fixtures prevent contact with HOT terminal 5 Inspect wiring in the conduit a Check wiring diagrams drawings for correct connection size and number of connectors b Check for proper identification markings on boxes spools and conductors 6 Inspect wiring boxes and electrical devices a Check that number of splices per box does not exceed maximum b Check for correct type of splice 7 Inspect for correct grounding rule use 8 Inspect for correct mounting of electrical boxes 9 Inspect for correct termination conductor on the device 10 Inspect for correct performance of quality control checks 11 Inspect for correct switch installation a Check single pole single throw toggle switch installation 1 Ensure only hot conductors are wired to switches 2 Check that one side of switch is connecte
225. ls polishing adapter lapping film microscope curing oven safety glasses ANSI TIA EIA 568B 569A cabling standard and manufacture instructions Standards Inspected the termination of the fiber optic connector to the fiber optic cable as indicated by manufacture instruction booklets and observed a reading level of no more than 1 db loss per connector Performance Steps 1 Supervise the cleaning of connector parts Supervise the preparation of cable and fiber Supervise the preparation of epoxy Inspect for crimp connectors Inspect for cure proxy Supervise the assembly connector parts on table Inspect cleave fiber ends Inspect polish fiber oO ON DO Oa A OO N Inspect the testing of fiber connector and cable Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Supervised the cleaning of connector parts Supervised the preparation of cable and fiber Supervised the preparation of epoxy Inspected for crimp connectors Inspected for cure proxy Supervised the assembly connector parts on table Inspected cleave fiber ends Inspected polish fiber na sL o ON DO Oo A W N Inspected the testing of fiber connector and cable Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the
226. m 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 SO RPRQAa20 0D Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected tower safety 2 Maintained guyed supported tower 3 Maintained antenna 4 Inspected ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 4 20 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 4 21 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN DELTA MATCHED DOUBLET ANTENNA 113 596 3011 Conditions Given delta matched doublet antenna installed carrier rail installed ground obstruction marker installed screwdriver set pliers common VSWR testing equipment wrench set tool kit TK 21 tape measure level knife safety equipment DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 FM 11 487 11 and the antenna safety manual Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Corrected the fault obstruction lights were operational and completed the VSWR test Performance Steps 1 Inspect tower safety devices a Check climbing belts for cuts frays and cracks b
227. m 2408 14 were available 2 Supervised routine checks 3 Verified that DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 have been completed Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 6625 3227 13 amp P TM 11 6625 3292 12 3 130 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE INSTALLATION OF MULTIPLEXERS 113 606 7026 Conditions Given a cable team squad multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC and multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC cable CX 11230A U power cords assorted circuit card assemblies CCAs TM 11 5805 706 12 and TM 11 5805 707 12 Standards Supervised that all equipment was powered up and the system was Green Performance Steps 1 Verify connection of the ground power cables and CX 11230A U 2 Check all CCA switches for correct configuration 3 Ensure power is on for equipment 4 Check for fault light s on TD 1233 P TTC TD 1234 P TTC and CCAs 5 Ensure power is turned off properly Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified connection of the ground power cables and CX 11230A U 2 Checked all CCA switches for correct configuration 3 Ensured power was on for equipment 4 Checke
228. m Planner Document SPD TC 24 20 and TM 11 5805 783 13 amp P Standards Installed LTU and established communications Performance Steps 1 2 3 O O N OQ A Verify location of the LTU Install LTU Configure rear panel a Install power cord b Install cabling to rear panel connectors as required in OPORD or SPD c Install CCAs in correct ports according to OPORD or SPD d Set the TIMBT CCA function switch to appropriate setting Set initial switch settings on front panel a Turn power switch to ON b Set the Test Select switch to Operate c Set Group Modem switches to appropriate settings d Set digital voice orderwire DVOW switches to appreciate settings Identify faults in built in test equipment BITE fault readings Correct faults if any Install J 1077 terminal box es Terminate cabling from rear panel to distant end as required by OPORD or SPD Terminate WF 16 from J 1077 to distant end as required by OPORD or SPD Establish communications Performance Measures 1 Installed LTU Oo N O oO A OO N Verified location of the LTU Configured rear panel Set initial switch settings on front panel Identified faults in BITE fault readings Corrected faults if any Installed J 1077 terminal box es Terminated cabling from rear panel to distant end as required by OPORD or SPD 12 August 2008 3 63 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO G
229. m the committed end to the center of the obstacle to be cleared 3 Starting at the committed end measure and mark the same distance on the conduit 4 Measure the saddle depth the distance from the surface the obstacle is against to the top of the obstacle Round off fractions to the nearest whole number 5 Rotate the conduit 180 degrees and place it in the bender aligning the B mark with the arrow and the TOE towards the A bend Bend the conduit 22 1 2 degrees then move the bender to the C mark on the conduit with the toe towards the A bend align with the arrow and bend the conduit 22 1 2 degrees 6 To bend the saddle align the A mark on the conduit with the rim notch of the bender and bend to 45 degrees 7 Check the saddle bend a The center of the A bend should be over the exact center of the obstacle b The saddle may be flush against the obstacle or up to a maximum of 1 2 inch away c The B and C bends must rest on the surface the obstacle is attached to i Perform angle bends 1 Measure and mark the conduit where you want the angle 2 Align the conduit with the arrow on the bender and bend the required number of degrees 3 Angle bends must be aligned with other bends already in the run j Perform right angle or 90 degree bend 1 The two types of 90 degree bends are the regular 90 degrees and the stub 90 degrees They are measured differently and bent on different marks There are two methods of determining
230. must be disconnected before work is performed on the tower Check tower for loose hardware Check tower for rust Inspect tower footing for loose hardware Check to ensure that tower is plumb tension guys are required Check tower ground for corrosion and loose hardware Note Reconnect radio equipment f Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Inspect antenna 4 38 a b c d e f Check antenna base Check down lead guys Check anchors Check structure Check antenna curtains Record uncorrected faults on DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 4 Inspect ground obstruction marker WARNING Do NOT damage the load contact relay when the relay contacts are cleaned Inspect obstruction lamps Check all interconnection cables and connectors for cracks and breaks Check control assembly Clean obstruction components Check electron tube Adjust timer beacon as required Lubricate shaft bearing and cam O WAzADAaqowys Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected tower safety devices 2 Inspected guys 3 Inspected antenna 4 Inspected ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong
231. n 2 The Army Training and Leader Development Model Figure 1 1 centers on developing trained and ready units led by competent and confident leaders The model depicts an important dynamic that creates a lifelong learning process The three core domains that shape the critical learning experiences throughout a Soldiers and leaders time span are the operational institutional and self development domains Together these domains interact using feedback and assessment from various sources and methods to maximize warfighting readiness Each domain has specific measurable actions that must occur to develop our leaders Figure 1 1 Army Training and Leader Development Model 3 The operational domain includes home station training CTC rotations and joint training exercises and deployments that satisfy national objectives Each of these actions provides foundational experiences for Soldier leader and unit development The institutional domain focuses on educating and training Soldiers and leaders on the key knowledge skills and attributes required to operate in any environment It includes individual unit and joint schools and advanced education The self development domain both structured and informal focuses on taking those actions necessary to reduce or eliminate the gap between operational and institutional experiences 1 2 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG 4 Throughout this lifelong learning and experience process there is fo
232. n System Subject Area 17 Computer Technology 113 580 7128 Supervise the Configuration of an AIS to Operate on a Network BNCOC AN 3 Subject Area 18 Navigation 113 610 7005 Implement Land Navigation Skills Using Global Positioning BNCOC SA 3 Systems Subject Area 19 Mobile Subscriber Equipment 113 611 6006 Lead Restoration of Transmission Link Within a Network BNCOC AN 3 113 593 1040 Establish Site Layout for Transmission Systems BNCOC AN 3 Subject Area 20 Antenna Installation 113 588 1086 Install Pressurized Cable System ASI AN 3 113 596 1024 Install Parabolic Antenna ASI AN 3 113 596 1027 Install AB 216 U Tower ASI AN 3 113 596 1040 Install Pressurized Transmission Lines ASI AN 3 113 596 1080 Install Self Support Tower ASI AN 3 113 596 1081 Remove Self Support Tower ASI AN 3 113 596 1082 Install Spira Cone High Frequency HF Antenna ASI AN 3 113 596 1083 Remove Spira Cone High Frequency HF Antenna ASI AN 3 113 596 1084 Remove AB 216 U Tower ASI AN 3 2 6 12 August 2008 Task Number 113 596 1086 113 596 3010 113 596 3011 113 596 3012 113 596 3014 113 596 3015 113 596 3016 113 596 3018 113 596 3021 113 596 3047 113 596 3049 113 596 4005 113 596 4008 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG CRITICAL TASKS Training Location Remove Broadband Dipole High Frequency HF Antenna Maintain Rotatable Log Periodic Antenna Maintain Delta Matched Doublet Antenna Maintain Fixed Log Pe
233. nchors 3 wire 1 2 inch flexible BX conduit wrench and screwdriver 12 August 2008 4 1 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Note Supervision and assistance are available Standards Installed the contactor terminal and the readings between the valve on the sleeve and contactor terminal are equal installed the transducer terminal with a test desk reading within the 2 5 volt tolerance and pressurized the cable and held constant pressure for 2 hours Performance Steps 1 Install bypass a Install aerial cable bypass b Install underground cable bypass c Install buried cable bypass 2 Install pressure plug a Install pressure plug using the sheath injection method 1 Prepare poly sheathed cables 2 Prepare lead sheathed cables 3 Prepare and inject plugging compound CAUTION The 4401 compound should NEVER be mixed with the 185N compound a Mix compound b Inject compound c Install 3A pressure plug d Install cable cap if required b Install pressure plug using the pour method with type 9 closure 1 Prepare cable 2 Place horizontal plug if required 3 Place vertical plug if required 4 Install combination plug and insulating joint if required 5 Mix and pour compounds CAUTION The 4401 compound should NEVER be mixed with the 185N compound c Install pressure plug using the pour method with 8980 series closure 1 Prepare cable 2 Pour compound CAUTION The 4401 compound should NEVER
234. nd TM 11 5805 201 12 Standards Located and repaired a line fault and restored communications Performance Steps Refer to TC 24 20 for all performance steps unless otherwise indicated 1 Verify telephone cable trouble exists 2 Test line for trouble and identify fault Refer to TM 11 5805 201 12 a Open b Short c Ground d Crossed circuit Localize fault Locate fault Repair fault Retest telephone cable N O oO fF QOQ Restore communications Evaluation Preparation Setup Ensure the telephone cable is installed and connected to the field phones Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier that the cable must be tested for operation Performance Measures GO NO GO Refer to TC 24 20 for all performance steps unless otherwise indicated 1 Verified that telephone cable trouble exists Tested line for trouble and identified fault Localized fault EN a Repaired fault 2 3 4 Located fault 5 6 Retested telephone cable 7 Restored communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 3 30 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related TC 24 20 TM 11 5805 201 12 12 August 2008 3 31 STP 11 25L
235. nd the IDF portion is counted starting with 01 to the growing end b When counting the horizontal side of a CDF the shelves of both frames are lettered from the bottom to the top To identify a particular horizontal terminal block the letter is first then the number starting with A1 for the MDF and A01 for the IDF Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified the purpose of distribution frames 2 Identified the construction of a distribution frame 3 Installed a distribution frame 4 Identified types of distribution frames Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 93 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL ANCHORING DEVICES 113 583 1004 Conditions Given a drill drill bit rotary hammer hammer star drill hand chuck 6 foot folding ruler screwdrivers adjustable wrench and material Standards Identified types of anchors needed and installed various types of anchoring devices Performance Steps 1 Locate hole for drilling a Bases that detach from equipment can be used as a template by placing the base in position and marking the mounting holes b Templates can be made when installing several of the same
236. nder toe pointed towards the committed end you must compensate for the gain that will occur f Check the bend with a framing square or level to ensure that it is exactly 90 degrees 4 Stub 90 degree bends are used where space is limited a The distance from the end of the conduit to the back of the 90 degree bend is called the stub length or simply the stub Part of this length is made up of the bender take up and the rest is the constant b The size of the take up and the constant depends on the type and size of the conduit For 1 2 inch EMT the take up is always 5 inches and the constant is always 2 inches c Mark a 2 inch constant at the end of the conduit This is the only mark you make d Align the mark with the arrow and bend to 90 degrees Check for accuracy in the same manner as the regular 90 degree bend k The kick out is a bend used with the stub 90 degrees in place of the offset 1 Place the bender on the conduit just before the bend between the stub 90 degrees and the committed end of the conduit The toe should point towards the stub 90 degrees 2 Slide the bender up the conduit toward the stub 90 degrees until it begins to bind on the stub 3 Back the bender off about an 1 8 inch and mark the conduit along the toe of the bender This mark will allow the bender to be placed in the original position in case the kick out has to be adjusted 4 Bend the conduit and check the kick out depth A back to bac
237. nds of long runs should be temporarily marked at the box or spool then after being run through the conduit marked at the spool again before cutting d Pull all conductors through the conduit before terminating and toward the distribution box when possible 1 Feed the fish tape through the appropriate conduit run 2 Strip 12 inches of insulation off each conductor 3 Use one conductor as a pole and wrap the other conductors around the pole 4 Create an eyelet on the pole conductor by looping the wire back and wrapping about six wraps on itself 5 Fasten the eyelet on the hook end of the fish tape 6 Feed the fish tape through the appropriate conduit run 2 Identify wiring boxes and electrical devices a The total number of splices per box depends on the size of the box and number and size of conductors 1 The handy and octagon boxes can have three splices per box with a maximum of four conductors per splice 2 The 4 x 4 and junction boxes can have four splices per box with a maximum of four conductors per splice b Identify the types of splices 1 The in the middle splice is commonly used to connect receptacles or lights in series a Measure and cut conductors A and C 6 inches from the edge of the box b Cut strip and attach a 6 inch piece of wire conductor B to the device Strip 2 inches of insulation from the other end of the conductor c Place conductors side by side lining up the edges of insulation using
238. nduit following all of the grounding rules d Check four way switch network 1 Check connection of the common terminal of a three way switch to the designated circuit breaker 2 Check connection of the traveler terminals for correctness 3 142 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 Check for correct connection of the common terminal of the second three way switch to the device 4 Check the neutral conductor for connection to the designated position on the neutral buss bar of the distribution panel and routed through the conduit to all devices requiring neutral in the branch circuit 5 Check the ground conductor for correct termination to the designated position on the ground buss bar of the distribution panel and routed through the conduit following all grounding rules e Check wiring of 120 V AC duplex receptacles with one or both receptacles switched 1 Check for connection of the common terminal of single throw switch with an insulated conductor from the source 2 Check that TAB 10n the receptacle for the two brass terminals is broken removed when switching only one receptacle Note TAB 1 must be intact when switching both receptacles a Check connection of the other common terminal on the switch to the common terminal on the duplex receptacle b Check for broken tab if only one receptacle is to be switched Then connect the second hot wire from the source to the second terminal on the re
239. ng a The roll n wipe method is used on larger surfaces such as terminal pins 1 Place the edge of the tip of the soldering iron on the terminal 2 When the terminal is hot enough to melt solder apply the solder under the tip and roll the tip over the terminal Immediately remove the solder and soldering iron from the terminal with the same rolling motion b The sweat method applies heat and solder to the area until the solder melts wicking solder through the connection This is the preferred method for soldering splices tubular pins and small terminals 1 Heat the connection with the tip of the soldering iron and apply the solder to the other side When the solder melts remove the soldering iron 2 Avoid moving the connection until it has cooled c The wipe on method is used for inaccessible areas only 1 When using this method apply flux to the connection first 2 Apply solder to the tip of the iron and wipe the solder on the connection 7 Identify the six basic steps of quality soldering a Heat the connection not the solder b Apply the solder to the terminal c Remove the solder allowing no excess solder to remain d Remove the heat Do not burn insulation on wires e Allow the connection to cool f Inspect 8 Identify safety requirements for soldering a Solder used in electronics contains 40 percent lead and requires good ventilation at the work area Never solder directly over the work piece b Wear s
240. ng or installing it Note Suggested method davit MX 1215 U a Install block and tackle to support b Hoist davit MX 1215 U using block and tackle c Attach davit MX 1215 U to tower d Attach lamp socket and cable assembly to each obstruction light assembly CAUTION Whenever the three conductor cable passes through a feed through connector the rubber plug in the connector must have an oversized hole In all unused feed through connectors the rubber must be replaced with a blank plug e Install obstruction light assembly on tower Note Use a tag line to hold the obstruction and cable assembly out from the tower at a safe distance to keep from damaging obstruction lights and cable assembly f Assemble attach beacon platform and cable assembly together g Hoist beacon platform and cable assembly to top of tower h Install beacon platform and cable assembly to tower i Install automatic control equipment on tower j Perform pre operational checks k Perform adjustment on control WARNING The circuit breaker lever must be placed in the OFF position before adjusting the position of the permanent magnet breaker Note It is recommended to make this adjustment in the early evening when the daylight intensity is approximately that at which the lights should come on each day Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Installed safety equipment 2 Installed tower 3 Installed ground obstruct
241. ng to established standards during both individual and collective training Battle focus is applied to all missions across the full spectrum of operations b Relationship of STPs to Battle focused Training The two key components of any STP are the Soldier s manual SM and trainer s guide TG Each gives leaders important information to help implement the battle focused training process The trainer s guide relates Soldier and leader tasks in the MOS and skill level to duty positions and equipment It states where the task is trained how often training should occur to sustain proficiency and who in the unit should be trained As leaders assess and plan training they should rely on the trainer s guide to help identify training needs 1 Leaders conduct and evaluate training based on Army wide training objectives and on the task standards published in the Soldier s manual task summaries or in the Reimer Digital Library The task summaries ensure that trainers in every unit and location define task standards the same way and trainers evaluate all Soldiers to the same standards 2 Figure 1 2 shows how battle focused training relates to the trainer s guide and Soldier s manual The left column shows the steps involved in training Soldiers and the right column shows how the STP supports each of these steps 1 4 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG BATTLE FOCUS PROCESS STP SUPPORT PROCESS Select supporting So
242. ngth 3 In the example a RHL 34 6 16 7 4 16 27 2 16 b RVL 35 8 16 14 21 8 16 c TRL 27 2 16 RHL 21 8 16 RVL 14 62 10 16 d Shrinkage from Table 9 1 for offset C of one inch equals 3 16 inch plus offset D of half inch is 0 for a total of 3 16 inch shrinkage e The gain for 1 2 conduit is 2 5 8 inches times two bends equal 5 2 8 or 5 4 16 total gain f Final length 62 10 16 3 16 Shrinkage 5 4 16 Gains 57 9 16 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified the purpose of conduit Identified types of conduit Identified rules for conduit Installation Identified conduit cutting tools Cut conduit Identified conduit bodies Identified utility boxes Installed conduit boxes and bodies Identified conduit couplings O oOo N O Oa A W N _ Installed box connectors Installed pipe clamps or conduit hangers N Removed knockouts to install conduit o Identified conduit bends 3 124 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO 14 Identified types of conduit benders 15 Bent conduit 16 Measured conduit runs Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wron
243. nk Forms directly to Commander US Army Signal Center and Fort Gordon ATTN ATZH DTM I Fort Gordon Georgia 30905 5074 This publication is available on the General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Library for viewing and downloading The World Wide Web WWW address is http www train army mil Unless this manual states otherwise masculine pronouns do not refer exclusively to men NOTE Information contained in this publication is subject to change as new equipment is added to the Army inventory and revisions in policy and doctrine are made vi 12 August 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 GENERAL The Soldier training publication STP identifies the individual military occupational specialty MOS and training requirements for Soldiers in various specialties Another source of STP task data is the General Dennis J Reimer Training and Doctrine Digital Library at http www train army mil Commanders trainers and Soldiers should use the STP to plan conduct and evaluate individual training in units The STP is the primary MOS reference to support the self development and training of every Soldier in the unit It is used with the Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks Army Training and Evaluation Programs ARTEPs and Field Manual FM 7 0 Training the Force to establish effective training plans and programs that integrate Soldier leader and collective tasks This chapter explains how to use the STP in establishing an effective ind
244. nssrnntnn nenne 3 106 113 588 0001 Troubleshoot Local Area Network Wide Area Network LAN WAN Substation Distribution System eee eeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeseaes 3 108 113 588 0020 Determine Cable Depth Using the 2273 Advanced Cable and Fault Locator 3 110 113 588 0021 Locate Cable Faults Using a Time Domain Reflectometer TDR Test Set 3 112 113 588 6008 Maintain a Communications Systems Installation Record CSIR 3 113 Subject Area 7 COMSEC 113 609 1002 Install Trunk Encryption Device c ce eccceeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeenaeeeeneaes 3 114 113 609 2002 Operate Trunk Encryption Device ccceceecccee cece ee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteceneaeeeeeeeeeneees 3 115 113 609 3001 Maintain Trunk Encryption DeViCE 0 eccceceeeceeeneeeeeenneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeenenaeeeeeeaes 3 116 Subject Area 8 CONDUIT 113 583 1010 Install Conduit i pot paia aai a aaaea a a a aaa Aaa aaia adaa AETAT 3 117 Skill Level 2 Subject Area 9 CABLE AND EQUIPMENT SUPERVISION 113 588 7005 Supervise Recovery of Cable Wire SySteMs cccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeecneeeeeeesaeeeeeeaes 3 126 113 588 7006 Supervise Troubleshooting of Cable Wire SysteMs cc ceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeesteeeeeees 3 127 113 588 7012 Supervise Installation of Cable Wire Systems cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeeaes 3 128 113 632 9014 Supervise Splicing of Commercial Fiber Optic Cable 0 cceeeeeeeetee
245. nstallation c The required test equipment should be listed in the EIP d Test procedures that provide details and minimum allowable results test specifications will be included in the EIP e Technical Acceptance Recommendations TAR will be provided in the EIP The TAR is conducted by the engineer or the engineer s representative with the O amp M Command representative Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified the EIP numbering 2 Identified the parts of an EIP 3 Identified major and minor drawings changes 4 Performed validation and testing Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 99 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM MARKING SITE LAYOUT 113 583 1008 Conditions Given the engineering installation package EIP floor plan tools chalk in various colors chalk line and reel grease pencils felt tip markers transparent tape 24 inch level 16 ounce plum bob 6 foot folding ruler carpenters square stepladders steel and linen measuring tapes fabricated compasses material and notes Standards Stated and performed the methods needed for marking site layout for preparing the installation of
246. nstalled mechanical dehydrator dehumidifier Installed dehydration pump system Installed dehydration nitrogen system for single transmission line Installed dehydration nitrogen system for multiple transmission line Purged cable line ns Z O o A W N Pressurized cable Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 4 9 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL SELF SUPPORT TOWER 113 596 1080 Conditions Given self support tower engineering scheme tools and equipment carrier rail material tower erection davit MX 1215 U safety equipment block and tackle FM 11 487 27 antenna safety manual and engineer scheme Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Installed the self support tower to include site selection site survey and base installation Performance Steps 1 Install safety equipment using tower method Note Safety climbing equipment must be installed either with the tower method or with the pole method 2 Install tower Refer to FM 11 487 27 and engineer
247. nsure that trainers and evaluators are not only tactically and technically competent on their training tasks but also understand how the training relates to the organization s METL Properly prepared trainers evaluators and leaders project confidence and enthusiasm to those being trained Trainer and leader training is a critical event in the preparation phase of training These individuals must demonstrate proficiency on the selected tasks prior to the conduct of training 3 Commanders with their subordinate leaders and trainers conduct site reconnaissance identify additional training support requirements and refine and issue the training execution plan The training plan should identify all those elements necessary to ensure the conduct of training to standard Rehearsals are essential to the execution of good training Realistic standards based performance oriented training requires rehearsals for trainers support personnel and evaluators Preparing for training in Reserve Component RC organizations can require complex pre execution checks RC trainers must often conduct detailed coordination to obtain equipment training support system products and ammunition from distant locations In addition RC pre execution checks may be required to coordinate Active Component assistance from the numbered Armies in the continental United States CONUSA training support divisions and directed training affiliations b Conduct of Training Ideall
248. number and pair counts 4 The horizontal side of an MDF mounts terminal blocks which provide termination points for cables that run to and from the IDF or circuit concentration frame bay There are no protector blocks on the horizontal side of the MDF 5 The horizontally mounted terminal blocks extend from one end of the frame to the other and each level or row is known as a shelf When lettering the horizontal side of an MDF the shelves are lettered alphabetically from the bottom to the top starting with A and skipping and O To identify a terminal block on the horizontal side start with the shelf letter then the vertical upright e g B5 b IDF 1 The purpose and function of the IDF is to provide a neat and flexible point of termination for inside cable and cross connects 3 92 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 2 The IDF has no protector devices and all equipment patch panels and tie cables from the MDF will appear on the IDF This is also the main work area for most wiring changes and in house troubleshooting 3 The ideal location for an IDF is parallel to the MDF and near the equipment it is serving 4 The vertical side of the IDF terminates the cable from the horizontal side of the MDF a The vertical side of the IDF mounts terminal blocks that are bolted to mounting clips The terminal block assignment drawings show the size and placement of terminal blocks that are mounted from the bot
249. ny environmental conditions that can alter task performance such as visibility temperature or wind This section also identifies any specific cues or events that trigger task performance such as a chemical attack or identification of a threat vehicle d Standards The task standards describe how well and to what level the task must be performed under wartime conditions Standards are typically described in terms of accuracy completeness and speed e Training and Evaluation The training evaluation section identifies specific actions known as performance steps which the Soldier must do to successfully complete the task These actions are in the evaluation guide section of the task summary and are listed in a GO NO GO format for easy evaluation For some tasks the training and evaluation section may also include detailed training information in a training information outline and an evaluation preparation section The evaluation preparation section indicates necessary modifications to task performance in order to train and evaluate a task that cannot be trained to the wartime conditions It may also include special training and evaluation preparation instructions to accommodate these modifications and any instructions that should be given to the Soldier before evaluation f References This section identifies references that provide more detailed and thorough explanations of task performance requirements than those given in the task summary d
250. o activate Performance Steps 1 Install power cable on interface adapter unit 2 Install TED Black Cable W 10 a W10 cable install from J4 on CV 4180A to TED J4 3 Install TED Red Cable W11 a W11 cable install from J1 on CV 4180A to TED J2 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Installed power cable on interface adapter unit 2 Installed TED Black Cable W 10 3 Installed TED Red Cable W11 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5810 365 10 3 114 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG OPERATE TRUNK ENCRYPTION DEVICE 113 609 2002 Conditions Given a KG 94A or KG 194A and IUA connection cables KYK 13 power source operation order OPORD and other associated equipment that has been previously installed Standards Operated TED in accordance with published OPORD Performance Steps 1 Turn power on 2 Perform lamp test 3 Loaded COMSEC Attach KYK 13 with fill cable to fill port on KG 94A or KG 194A Turn KYK 13 mode switch to on Turn function switch on KG to load Press and release the actuate switch on the KG Parity lamp on KYK 13 will blink Parity LED on KG will light power on and alarm LED will s
251. o use these materials to maintain performance 1 8 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG 1 8 TRAINING SUPPORT This manual includes the following appendixes and information that provide additional training support information a Appendix A DA Form 5164 R Hands on Evaluation This appendix contains the instructions for using DA Form 5164 R and a completed sample form for NCOs to use during evaluation of Soldiers manual tasks b Appendix B DA Form 5165 R Field Expedient Squad Book This appendix contains the instructions for using DA Form 5165 R and a completed sample form for NCOs to use during evaluation of Soldiers manual tasks c Glossary The glossary is a single comprehensive list of acronyms abbreviations definitions and letter symbols d References This section contains two lists of references required and related which support training of all tasks in this SM Required references are listed in the conditions statement and are required for the Soldier to do the task Related references are materials that provide more detailed information and a more thorough explanation of task performance 1 9 FEEDACK Recommendations for improvement of this STP are requested Feedback will help to ensure that this STP answers the training needs of units in the field 12 August 2008 1 9 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 2 Trainer s Guide 2 1 GENERAL The MOS Training Plan MTP identifies the essential com
252. oads d A maximum of one splice between supports is permitted for cable rack threaded rod lipped channel channel or framing bar 6 Identify safe load capacities 7 Reduce cable rack a Cut cable rack squarely b Measure and mark the length of cable rack to be cut c Cut the stringers at the marks with a hand hacksaw or a power hacksaw d If the cable rack must be cut at the junction of the stringers and a cross strap remove the cross strap by cutting as close to the stringer as possible without cutting the stringer e File off all burrs on the ends of the stringer 8 Ground bond cable rack a Cable rack will be strapped bonded at all junctions and splices with 12 American wire gauge AWG or larger solid or stranded wire on the outside of the stringer to ensure a continuous electrical connection b After all cable rack sections have been strapped bond the cable rack to the equipotential plane or inner ground ring 2 feet from each end and at intervals of 50 feet along the run c The cable rack must also be bonded to the fault protection bus bar in the nearest AC distribution panel with 6 AWG green insulated wire 9 Install wireway cable duct a Duct is used where physical protection of cables and conductors is required b Wireway or duct is available with or without knockouts in lengths of 1 foot 2 feet 3 feet 4 feet 5 feet and 10 feet c Duct runs are hung in place using tray supports at 5 foot intervals
253. of the first marker and will have the connection information of the opposite end of the cable as defined in the EIP 3 Cables and labels will be placed so they can be easily read d The Bradymarker XC Label Printer or equivalent is recommended for the printing adhesive labels Detailed instructions for the operation of these label printers are provided with each printer Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Marked cables Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TC 24 20 ANSI TIA EIA 606 A 12 August 2008 3 3 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL CONNECTORS ON COPPER CABLE 113 588 2003 Conditions Given tools materials radio frequency RF connectors and copper cables Standards Installed RF connectors tested cable after connectors were installed and knew the elements of the RF cable Performance Steps 1 Identify the elements of the RF coaxial cable a RF cable is a transmission line coaxial that consists of a center conductor and an outer conductor separated by a dielectric b The characteristic impedance of most coaxial cables is between 50 and 100 ohms however special purpose coaxial cables may have impedance values outside this range c The following should be cons
254. onditions Standards Measurements were within 25 feet of the evaluators readings for each fault reading taken Performance Steps 1 Perform operations check a Set controls 2 Locate short a Connect the test cables to cable connector b Connect the test cables to the tip and ring of good pair c Set controls d Disconnect the test cable from good pair e Connect the test cables to the tip and ring of the shorted pair f Measure and record the distance to the fault 3 Locate crosses a Connect the test cable to the tip and ring of only ONE pair involved in the cross b Measure and record the distance to the fault 4 Locate grounds a Connect the test cable to the tip and ring of a pair containing ground b Measure and record the distance to the fault 5 Locate opens a Connect the test cable to the tip and ring of a pair containing an open b Measure and record the distance to the fault Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Performed operations check 2 Located short 3 Located crosses 4 Located grounds 5 Located opens Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 3 112 12 August 2008 STP 11
255. onduit in a vise for cutting reaming and filing Pad the jaws with wood or cardboard to protect the conduit b The pipe or conduit cutter is the preferred tool for cutting conduit 1 Place the cutter over the conduit centering it on the rollers and adjust the cutting wheel inward until it makes contact 2 Tighten the cutter just enough to score the conduit on the first turn 3 Rotate the cutter around the conduit one turn and then tighten about a 1 4 of a turn for each rotation until the conduit has been cut c Cut the conduit using a Hacksaw 1 Place the conduit in a vise as described above 2 Select the proper hacksaw blade Use a fine tooth blade when cutting thin material such as EMT and a coarser blade for thick material such as Rigid 3 118 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 Cut the material using a steady full length stroke and light pressure 4 Cutting flex conduit using a hacksaw The spiral construction of flex conduit makes it necessary to cut it at an angle so only one section of the steel strip is cut through 5 Cut LTF straight through with a hacksaw supporting it firmly d Ream the conduit 1 Place the reamer on the end of the conduit and rotate it to remove the burrs 2 After reaming rigid conduit must be threaded 3 The same procedure is used for reaming EMT conduit 6 Identify conduit bodies a Conduit bodies can be used to change direction or for branching b They prov
256. ope to comprise military occupation specialty or AOC See AR 614 200 and DA Pam 611 21 Army Training and Evaluation Program ARTEP The US Army s collective training program The ARTEP establishes unit training objectives critical to unit survival and performance in combat They combine the training and the evaluation processes into one integrated function The ARTEP is a training program and not a test The sole purpose of external evaluation under this program is to diagnose unit requirements for future training common task A critical task for which all Soldiers at a given skill level are accountable regardless of their MOS duty position The job a service member performs within the unit DA Pam 611 21 has names of official duty positions for each MOS individual training Training which the officer NCO or Soldier receives in the training base units on the job or by self study This training prepares the individual to perform specified duties or tasks related to the assigned or next higher specialty code of MOS skill level and duty position Glossary 4 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MOS training plan MTP The MTP is a guide for the conduct of individual training in units The MTP is developed for each MOS AOC and addresses all skill levels of an MOS AOC and all duty positions The MTP lists all MOS AOC specific and shared critical tasks for which the MOS AOC is responsible It will not include common tasks Ohm The uni
257. open flame Trichlorotrifluoroethane is not flammable but exposure of the fumes to an open flame converts the fumes to highly toxic dangerous gases Clean the exterior of the dehydrator remove rust dirt grease and fungus Prepare equipment for repainting refinishing Clean hand pump as required with clean dry rag Lubricate hand pump shaft as required with a light coat of grease Check hand pump for loose connections tighten as required Check air tubing line for loose connections tighten replace as required Check pressure gauge for proper reading Check cylinder for loose connections tighten as required Replace nitrogen cylinder when it becomes empty Check pressure gauge for proper reading 15 Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Checked low pressure alarm for defects 12 August 2008 4 43 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures O oOo N O oO A W N ak i e a Cre A OO N 15 Checked humidity assembly for defects Checked air tank drain valve for defects Checked dehydrator for evidence of fungus Cleaned the exterior of the dehydrator removed rust dirt grease and fungus Prepared equipment for repainting refinishing Cleaned hand pump as required with clean dry rag Lubricated hand pump shaft as required with a light coat of grease Checked hand pump for loose conn
258. opening and insert conductors individually into VS 3 hand tool Place each conductor of each pair into the hand tool and crimp the connector on them individually Clear cap 4 pair in each cable using the stagger cut method Perform visual inspection of connections st 2008 3 9 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps h Wrap conductors with muslin i Wrap the splice with polyethylene tape j Secure with paper tape Performance Measures 1 Made cable splice 2 Performed a bridge splice 3 Performed a butt splice Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacture s Manual 3 10 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL AC DC POWER SOURCE FOR COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT 113 588 2005 Conditions Given tools material and alternating current AC DC wiring and the EIP Standards Installed AC DC wiring in compliance with the National Electric Code and the EIP Performance Steps 1 Install AC wire through conduit a Prior to pulling conductors through conduit consult the drawing for the correct connection size and number of conductors needed b Short runs may be pulled from the spool or box Temporarily mark the conductor ends for identification c The e
259. operation e Lubricate grease fitting on gearbox Note The bearing should be lubricated every 3 months f Check setscrews on motor flywheel for tightness g Check slack on rotator chain CAUTION Tightening the rotator mount bolts may cause tension on the chain Note Reconnect the radio equipment h Perform VSWR test i Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 4 Inspect ground obstruction marker WARNING The load contact relay should not be damaged when the relay contacts are cleaned a Inspect obstruction lamps b Check all interconnecting cables and connectors for cracks and breaks c Check control assembly d Clean obstruction components e Check electron tube f Adjust timer beacon as required g Lubricate shaft bearing and cam h Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected tower safety devices 2 Maintained guyed supported tower 3 Maintained antenna 4 Inspected ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 12 August 2008 4 25 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 4 26 12
260. or is secured to the flex conduit with a built in clamp The cut end of the conduit must be pushed as far as possible into the connector to protect the conductors from damage e Install liquid tight box connectors 1 LTF connectors consist of seven parts compression nut gland ring steel grounding ferrule connector body O ring shield O ring assembly and locknut 2 Slide the compression nut and gland ring over the conduit 3 Slide the steel grounding ferrule onto the end of the conduit 4 Place the body over the steel grounding ferrule and finger tighten the compression nut 5 Place the O ring shield and O ring over the end of the body 6 Place the small threaded end of the body into the liquid tight box and tighten the locknut 11 Install pipe clamps or conduit hangers a Pipe straps or clamps support conduit runs and holds the conduit against flat surfaces such as walls ceilings or floors b Clamps are available with one or two mounting holes in various sizes of stamped steel for EMT or cast iron for rigid c Conduit hangers are used to attach conduit to the ceiling or wall and are made for various sizes of conduit 12 Remove knockouts to install conduit a They are built in to the boxes in different sizes as either single or concentric Concentric knockouts permit selection of hole sizes depending on conduit requirements b Remove knockouts by striking a sharp blow with a hammer and twisting it off with a pair of
261. or silver secondary conductor flush with the cone insulator or as close as possible Strip small portions at a time and do not nick the conductor k Twist the strands together and pull the secondary conductor to the side Temporarily place the slotted insulator on the Blue or Copper Primary or Center conductor with the slotted side down toward the cable butt Mark the primary conductor even with the top of the slotted insulator Remove the slotted insulator and strip the primary Blue or Copper conductor to the mark Place the slotted insulator on the primary center conductor again to check the stripped length if necessary remove the insulator and strip the conductor to the correct length The insulation will stretch so don t strip off too much and do not knick the conductor m Place the slotted insulator on the primary center conductor The conductor s insulation should touch the bottom of the slotted insulator Twist the strands of the center conductor and tin it lightly with 60 40 rosin core solder Use flux but don t use too much solder n Place the center pin next to the stripped primary conductor to measure the length of the conductor Cut the conductor the even with the inside shoulder of the pin The conductor should touch the inside bottom of the pin and the pin must touch the slotted insulator o Place the pin on the center primary conductor The conductor must be visible in the pin s inspection hole and it must touch t
262. ording to splicing technique Prepared fiber cable Sne Spliced fiber cable according to splicing technique Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 3 24 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON TELEPHONE TEST SET TS 3647 G 113 574 3006 Conditions Given telephone test set TS 3647 G a 4 inch flat tip screwdriver dust brush and cleaning rags cable CX 11230A G TD 1218 G or TD 1219 G TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC ground wire DA Form 2404 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet DA Form 2408 14 Uncorrected Fault Record TM 11 5805 703 14 and DA Pam 750 8 Standards Performed ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the telephone test set was operational or evacuated the defective test set to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps 1 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Perform routine checks Refer to TM 11 5805 703 14 a Clean wash and dust b Check for frayed cables c Store unused items d Cover unused receptacles e Check for loose nuts bolts and screws Note A ground wire should be attached from ground lug on front panel of the cable ord
263. originates at the common buss of the SEP 2 Inspect the distribution panel a Inspect panel arrangement of the buss bars 1 Single phase a L 1 leg serves circuit breakers 1 amp 2 5 amp 6 9 amp 10 etc b L 2 leg serves circuit breakers 3 amp 4 7 amp 8 11 amp 12 etc 2 Three phase a L 1 leg serves circuit breakers 1 amp 2 7 amp 8 13 amp 14 etc b L 2 leg serves circuit breakers 3 amp 4 9 amp 10 15 amp 16 etc c L 3 leg serves circuit breakers 5 amp 6 11 amp 12 17 amp 18 etc b Inspect the ground buss bar to ensure it is properly bonded to the panel chassis 3 140 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps c Inspect neutral buss bar to ensure it is insulated from the panel chassis and the protective ground d Inspect the numbering of the circuit breakers Note Circuit breakers are counted from left to right and top to bottom and visualized as if mounted in the vertical position regardless of how it is actually mounted 3 Inspect the branch circuits a Ensure no smaller than 14 AWG b Ensure conductors are only used in one branch circuit or device c Inspect for compliance with NEC and MIL STD 188 124B on the number of conductors in a conduit d Check the branch circuit color code for single phase AC 1 L 1 Hot Black 2 L 2 Hot Black 3 Neutral White or Gray 4 Ground Green e Check the branch circuit color code for three phase AC 1 Phase A Black
264. orm 2404 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Pam 750 8 4 40 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN COAXIAL CABLE FOR ANTENNA SYSTEMS 113 596 4005 Conditions Given materials tools safety equipment warning sign and DA Form 2404 and DA Pam 750 8 Note This task is performed during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Performed the air pressure and electrical test on the cable repressurized the cable and recorded any uncorrected faults on DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Disconnect coaxial cable Note Place WARNING sign on transmitter 2 Check air pressure in the coaxial cable Note Turn off pressurization equipment 3 Repair coaxial cable 4 Perform electrical test on cable 5 Connect coaxial cable from antenna to radio equipment 6 Repressurize cable Note Remove WARNING sign 7 Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Disconnected coaxial cable Checked air pressure in the coaxial cable Repaired coaxial cable Performed electrical t
265. ors for termination d Terminate conductors using the D 814 impact tool with 110 blade CAUTION Ensure the impact setting is adjusted to low impact Also ensure the outlet connector is located on a solid surface e Secure outlet connector f Test cable repair faults and annotate results 4 Terminate cable in telecommunications closet a Prepare cable by managing slack b Locate which side of the equipment the cable will terminate on c Form the cable to the desired terminating block 3 104 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps d e f g Prepare cable for termination Terminate conductors using the D 814 tool with 110 blade Terminate conductors on a 700 series MDF terminal using the wire wrap method Test cable repair faults if required and annotate results 5 Fabricate a CAT 5 unshielded twisted pair UTP patch cord if required a e f g Inventory parts b Remove jacket c d Align conductors from left to right according to the T568A or the T568B terminating Untwist all the cable pairs to the ringed jacket configuration Position conductors into rear of RJ 45 plug Insert the front of the plug into the RJ 45 slot of the crimping tool and squeeze handle fully Ensure conductors and jacket are fully seated and crimped 6 Test cable for faults Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Conducted pre installation procedures O oa A W N Installed
266. ors with a waterproof covering jacket 2 Semiflexible cable can be formed into moderate bends during the installation but require precise care and handling It can use three forms of dielectric air continuous solid polyethylene or semisolid foam 3 Rigid RF cable is a special application for permanent installation where ruggedness low attenuation and high power are the prime considerations Rigid sections fittings and accessories cannot be bent or formed in any manner It must be installed with care and precision being careful not to deform or dent it 3 Identify the types of RF Cable The use of RF cable can suppress unwanted noise electromagnetic interference EMI and radio frequency interference RFI a Coaxial cable is RF cable that has a center and outer conductor separated from each other by a dielectric with both conductors capable of carrying signal currents It normally has a black jacket 1 The outer braid is the return 2 In cases of potential interference shielded cable should be used 3 Grounded coaxial can pass high data rates from 20 kHz to 5 GHz but is subject to ground loops as well as magnetic and radiated noise 4 Ungrounded coaxial substantially lowers the interference b Twinax cable is a two conductor twisted balanced wire lines having specific impedance with a braid shield around both wires It normally has a blue jacket 1 Twinax provides protection against capacitive fields and
267. ositive feedback that coaches and leads subordinate leaders to achieve the Army standard This is a tested and proven path to develop competent confident adaptive leaders b Evaluators Commanders must plan for formal evaluation and must ensure the evaluators are trained These evaluators must also be trained as facilitators to conduct AARs that elicit maximum participation from those being trained External evaluators will be certified in the tasks they are evaluating and normally will not be dual hatted as a participant in the training being executed c Role of Commanders and Leaders Commanders ensure that evaluations take place at each echelon in the organization Commanders use this feedback to teach coach and mentor their subordinates They ensure that every training event is evaluated as part of training execution and that every trainer conducts evaluations Commanders use evaluations to focus command attention by requiring evaluation of specific mission essential and battle tasks They also take advantage of evaluation information to develop appropriate lessons learned for distribution throughout their commands d AAR The AAR whether formal or informal provides feedback for all training It is a structured review process that allows participating Soldiers leaders and units to discover for themselves what happened during the training why it happened and how it can be done better The AAR is a professional discussion that requires the
268. ours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions You will work as a team member to perform this task Standards Corrected the fault and completed DA Form 2404 Performance Steps 1 Inspect tower safety devices a Check climbing belts for cuts frays and cracks b C Check climbing sleeve bearing Check locking pawl for cleanliness and excess wear Note Ensure the radius of the locking edge does NOT exceed 1 16 inch when worn d Check the locking pawl spring for proper tension 2 Inspect tower a b c d e f Check base for signs of deterioration Check for grounding Check for loose braces Check paint Check structure for signs of deterioration Record uncorrected faults on DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Inspect obstruction lamps mOonqw DAanns W WARNING Do NOT damage the load contact relay when the relay contacts are cleaned Inspect obstruction lamps Check all interconnecting cables and connectors for cracks and breaks Check control assembly Check obstruction components Check electron tube Adjust timer beacon as required Lubricate shaft bearing and cam 4 36 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected tower safety devices 2 Inspected tower 3 Inspected ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed
269. phone 6 Establish communications Evaluation Preparation Setup Ensure the telephone cable is laid and connected to the appropriate switching equipment or another TA 838 TT Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier which mode of operation and type of installation must be performed Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Installed batteries Performed pre installation checks Mounted telephone set on desk or vertical mount 2 3 4 Determined if switchboard connections were 4 wire or 2 wire 5 Connected WF 16 U to telephone 6 Established communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5805 650 12 12 August 2008 3 75 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL KY 68 113 600 1022 Conditions Given a DSVT TSEC KY 68 telephone cable WF 16 U loaded device KYK 13 TSEC KYK 15 CYZ 10 battery BA 5372 TD 1233 P TTC or TD 1234 P TTC TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P and TM 11 5810 329 10 Note The DSVT TSEC KY 68 is classified equipment It should be handled properly Standards Installed the DSVT loaded variables and established secure communications Performance Steps 1 Install battery Note Replace
270. pment layout f Review the CRL g Inspect the marking of any drawing changes h Inspect the design of the network link 1 Verify equipment requirements and available references 2 Verify termination diagrams and requirements for compatibility 3 Verify correct power source and current requirements for all equipment Inspect the installation of the network link 1 Verify the correct equipment is used in accordance with applicable references and requirements 2 Verify correct termination in accordance with diagrams and references 3 Verify correct voltage and current for each piece of equipment 3 Inspect validation and testing results a Verify that testing was performed in accordance with the test plan in the EIP b Review sequence of testing to ensure compliance with EIP c Verify that correct testing equipment is listed in the EIP Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected the EIP 2 Reviewed the installation steps and instructions 3 Inspected validation and testing results 3 166 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 TM 11 5805 706 12 TM 11 5805 707 12 12 August 2008 3 167 STP 1
271. ponents of a unit training plan for individual training Units have different training needs and requirements based on differences in environment location equipment dispersion and similar factors Therefore the MTP should be used as a guide for conducting unit training and not a rigid standard The MTP shows the relationship of an MOS skill level between duty position and critical tasks These critical tasks are grouped by task commonality into subject areas The MTP s Subject Area Codes list subject area numbers and titles used throughout the MTP These subject areas are used to define the training requirements for each duty position within an MOS The Duty Position Training Requirements table identifies the total training requirement for each duty position within an MOS and provides a recommendation for cross training and train up merger training Duty Position column This column lists the duty positions of the MOS by skill level which have different training requirements Subject Area column This column lists by numerical key the subject areas a Soldier must be proficient in to perform in that duty position Cross Train column This column lists the recommended duty position for which Soldiers should be cross trained Train up Merger column This column lists the corresponding duty position for the next higher skill level or MOSC the Soldier will merge into on promotion The Critical Task List table lists by general subject are
272. poxy to the outer jacket and fiber c Thread the connector onto the fiber d Examine the epoxy bead Note The epoxy bead height should be 2 to 4 fiber diameters above the ceramic tip If not additional epoxy must be applied around the base to build the bead to the proper height 3 22 e Crimp the connector onto the cables outer jacket f Install the load adapter onto the connector g Secure the strain relief boot 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 5 Cure proxy a Heat oven to the proper temperature b Place connector into one of the oven s ports c Allow 20 minutes for curing time or specified time as per connector d Remove connector from oven and place in the curing stand to cool for at least 5 minutes 6 Cleave fiber ends a Remove the load adapter allow the connector to cool to room temperature before cleaving b Cleave the fiber end c Check the fiber end Note The fiber should not protrude from the epoxy bead more than one fiber diameter 7 Polish fiber a Prepare polishing surface using a lint free cloth dampened with alcohol b Prepare the polishing adapter using a lint free cloth moistened with alcohol c Polish fiber refer to manufacture s manual 8 Test fiber connector and cable Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inventoried and clean connector parts Prepared cable and fiber Prepared epoxy ae Crimped connectors Cured proxy Ee
273. ps 1 Identify location requirements 2 Install cord connections a CAT V telephone line connection Straight through cable 3 Program the telephone IAW the Cisco telephone manual 4 Establish communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified location requirements 2 Installed cord connections 3 Programmed the telephone IAW the Cisco telephone manual 4 Established communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 69 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TROUBLESHOOT KY 68 113 600 0011 Conditions Given DSVT TSEC KY 68 telephone cable WF 16 U multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC radio repeater set AN TRC 138A radio terminal set AN TRC 173 radio repeater set AN TRC 174 radio terminal set AN TRC 175 BA 1372 1 each TM 11 5810 329 10 TM 11 5820 864 12 1 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 and TM 11 5820 931 12 1 Note The unkeyed DSVT TSEC KY 68 is classified CONFIDENTIAL It should be handled properly The DSVT TSEC KY 68 is loaded with variables for the PMs Standards Performed troubleshooting procedures identified problems took corrective action
274. quency code military operations other than war Military Occupational Specialty maintenance orderwire 12 August 2008 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG mobile subscriber equipment MOS Training Plan nuclear biological chemical noncommissioned officer National Electric Code network interface card number national stock number outside Continental United States Operations and Maintenance operation order optical strength meter pamphlet POUR ACID INTO WATER SLOWLY personal computer Project Concurrence Memorandum Precision Lightweight Global Positioning System Receiver performance measure s preventive maintenance checks and services point s of contact power take off push to talk Polyvinyl Chloride power Quarterly frequency code Reserve Component radio frequency radio frequency interference rough horizontal link remote loop group multiplexer remote multiplexer combiner rough vertical link semiannually frequency code standard cubic feet per day service entry panel skill level Soldier s manual subminiature version A standing operating procedure system planner document straight tip secure telephone equipment Soldier training publication secure telephone unit third generation sustainment tactical Training Aids Devices Simulators and Simulations technical acceptance recommendation technical bulletin training circular Transmission Control Protocol Time Domain Reflectometer
275. r individual Soldier training information that does not fit standard requirements for other established types of training publications TCs are part of the Armywide Doctrinal and Training Literature Program ADTLP 12 August 2008 Glossary 5 This page intentionally left blank REQUIRED PUBLICATIONS References Required publications are sources that users must read in order to understand or to comply with this publication Army Regulations AR 25 2 AR 380 5 AR 614 200 Department of Army Forms DA Form 2404 DA Form 2407 DA Form 2408 14 DA Form 5988 E Information Assurance 24 October 2007 Department of the Army Information Security Program 29 September 2000 Enlisted Assignments and Utilization Management 27 June 2007 Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet Maintenance Request Uncorrected Fault Record Equipment Inspection Maintenance Worksheet EGA Department of Army Pamphlets DA Pam 25 16 DA Pam 611 21 DA Pam 750 8 Field Manuals FM 1 02 FM 11 372 1 FM 11 372 8 FM 11 487 11 FM 11 487 25 FM 11 487 27 FM 24 1 FM 3 25 26 FM 7 0 Other Product Types ANSI TIA EIA 568B ANSI TIA EIA 569 A ANSI TIA EIA 606 A Antenna Safety Manual ISBN 0072122269 12 August 2008 Security Procedures for the Secure Telephone Unit Third Generation STU III 1 April 1993 Military Occupational Classification and Structure 22 January 2007 The Army Maintenance Management System TAMMS Users Manual
276. r six wires against mother strand g Make wraps tight and cut off excess wire Note Six side harnesses are required to the rhombic antenna curtain 6 Fabricate end harness 3 wire Note Two end harnesses are required for the rhombic antenna curtain a Select a straight and even cross arm and cut two pieces 3 feet long Note Treat the sawed areas with wood preservative b Measure and mark the points for drilling c Cut a 5 8 inch by 14 inch double arming bolt in half file off the burrs of each side d Attach the 3 bolt clamps of harness cross arm using the cut bolts e Mount cross arm on top of harness strand clamps f Adjust the 5 8 inch nuts holding harness strand to cross arm Loosen enough to permit harness to adjust itself to line of antenna curtain 4 28 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps g Install downed eyebolts into the 9 16 inch hole of cross arm Note Do NOT tighten the nut fully Allow the eyebolts to be free in the holes so that tension variations to the down lead wires can be made Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected tower safety devices Maintained guyed supported tower Maintained antenna Inspected ground obstruction marker Fabricated harness 3 wire antenna O o A W N Fabricated end harness 3 wire Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is fai
277. rawing index b All drawings will be as complete and self sufficient as possible c A or B size drawings will be included for reference and three sets of D size drawing 22 X 34 for use by the installation team 9 Define type of drawings a Master drawings The original drawing from which all other copies are made b Reproducible drawings A copy of the master that is sufficient quality that it can be used to make Blue Line copies c Blue Line drawings The hard copy of a master or revised drawing working copy d As Built red lined drawings These drawings reflect the actual installation after completion of a specific project or site e Plant In Place These drawings reflect the current configuration of an operating facility 10 Identify site specific drawing numbering system Configuration item identification number CIIN is made up of fourteen characters a Part 1 The first five positions The first two characters are a country designation and the next three characters identity the site b Part 2 Position six It identifies the major function code type of site c Part 3 Position seven It is a hyphen used to separate the alphabetical characters of parts 2 and 4 d Part 4 Positions eight and nine These positions indicate type of drawing two letters that identify the function of the drawings e The last five positions These positions are a numeric sequence beginning with 90001 If the master drawing h
278. re Systems AIT SA 1 3 113 588 2010 Recover Cable Wire System AIT SA 1 3 113 632 4001 Install Commercial Fiber Optic Terminators Connectors AIT AN 1 3 113 632 4002 Splice Commercial Fiber Optic Cable AIT SA 1 3 113 574 3006 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Telephone Test Set AIT AN 1 3 TS 3647 G 113 574 3010 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Electrical Cable Test AIT SA 1 3 Set AN GTM 12 113 574 3011 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Test Set TS 4117 G AIT SA 1 3 113 588 0005 Troubleshoot Telephone Cable WD 1 TT or WF 16 U UNIT SA 1 3 113 588 0016 Troubleshoot CX 11230A G Cable System AIT SA 1 3 113 588 0018 Troubleshoot 26 Pair Cable CX 4566 G AIT SA 1 3 113 588 1002 Set Poles UNIT AN 1 3 113 588 1074 Install Aerial Cable Splicing Equipment AIT AN 1 3 113 588 1075 Install Underground Cable Splicing Equipment AIT AN 1 3 113 588 1106 Install a Connector on a Stranded Flexible Coaxial Cable AIT AN 1 3 113 588 1107 Install Underground Cable System AIT AN 1 3 113 588 1108 Install a CAD 6 Buried Distribution Terminal AIT AN 1 3 113 588 3005 Perform Unit Level Maintenance ULM on Reel Unit RL 31 AIT SA 1 3 113 588 4022 Repair Plastic Sheathed Cable AIT AN 1 3 113 588 8001 Perform Pole Rescue Operation UNIT AN 1 3 113 588 9008 Make a Coaxial Cable Splice AIT SA 1 3 113 632 5001 Troubleshoot Fiber Optic Transmission System FOTS Cable AIT SA 1 3 System 113 632 5002 Troubleshoot Fiber Optic Cable AIT SA 1 3 12 August 2008 2 3 STP
279. re passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related AR 25 2 Manufacturer s Manuals 3 138 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE TROUBLESHOOTING OF LOCAL AREA NETWORK WIDE AREA NETWORK LAN WAN SUBSTATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 113 588 7007 Conditions Given a pre existing LAN or WAN substation distribution system ohmmeter spectrum analyzer TDR loss test set power meter optical fault finder network documents and manufacturer s instruction booklets Standards Performed troubleshooting of a pre existing LAN or WAN substation distribution system identified the problem corrected the fault s and reestablished communications Performance Steps 1 Verify that the trouble exists a Ensure Soldiers visual inspect the cable b Ensure Soldiers test the cable according to type 2 Identify fault 3 Isolate fault 4 Repair fault 5 Restore communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified that the trouble exists 2 Identified fault 3 Isolated fault 4 Repaired fault 5 Restored communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the
280. rent types of operations simultaneously and sequentially to accomplish missions in war and MOOTW These missions require training since future conflict will likely involve a mix of combat and MOOTW often concurrently The range of possible missions complicates training Army forces cannot train for every possible mission they train for war and prepare for specific missions as time and circumstances permit 3 Our forces today use a train alert deploy sequence We cannot count on the time or opportunity to correct or make up training deficiencies after deployment Maintaining forces that are ready now places increased emphasis on training and the priority of training This concept is a key link between operational and training doctrine 4 Units train to be ready for war based on the requirements of a precise and specific mission in the process they develop a foundation of combat skills that can be refined based on the requirements of the assigned mission Upon alert commanders assess and refine from this foundation of skills In the train alert deploy process commanders use whatever time the alert cycle provides to continue refinement of mission focused training Training continues during time available between alert notification and deployment between deployment and employment and even during employment as units adapt to the specific battlefield environment and assimilate combat replacements 12 August 2008 1 1 STP 11 25L13 SM TG b How
281. required to correct deficiencies AARs with leaders focus on tactical judgment These AARs contribute to leader learning and provide opportunities for leader development AARs with trainers and evaluators provide additional opportunities for leader development 1 6 TRAINING ASSESSMENT Assessment is the commander s responsibility It is the commander s judgment of the organization s ability to accomplish its wartime operational mission Assessment is a continuous process that includes evaluating individual training conducting an organizational assessment and preparing a training assessment The commander uses his experience feedback from training evaluations and other evaluations and reports to arrive at his assessment Assessment is both the end and the beginning of the training management process Training assessment is more than just training evaluation and encompasses a wide variety of inputs Assessments include such diverse systems as training force integration logistics and personnel and provide the link between the unit s performance and the Army standard Evaluation of training is however a major component of assessment Training evaluations provide the commander with feedback on the demonstrated training proficiency of Soldiers leaders battle staffs and units Commanders cannot personally observe all training in their organization and therefore gather feedback from their senior staff officers and NCOs a Evaluation of Training
282. riodic Antenna Maintain Rhombic Antenna Maintain Parabolic Antenna Maintain Yagi Antenna Maintain AB 216 U Tower Maintain Self Support Tower Maintain Spira Cone High Frequency HF Antenna Maintain Broadband Dipole High Frequency HF Antenna Maintain Coaxial Cable for Antenna Systems Maintain Pressurization Equipment OW wWwwWwWwwwnwwonwwo wo Ww 2 7 This page intentionally left blank Chapter 3 MOS Skill Level Tasks Skill Level 1 Subject Area 1 NAVIGATE NAVIGATE USING THE AN PSN 11 113 610 2044 Conditions Given a requirement operational precision lightweight global positioning system receiver PLGR AN PSN 11 battery lithium storage BA 5800 U COMSEC device KYK 13 TSEC or AN CYZ 10 initialization setup and waypoint information and TM 11 5825 291 13 Note This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation Supervision and assistance are available Standards Initialized and loaded the PLGR with COMSEC variables entered setup and waypoint information receiver acquired four satellites and user successfully navigated to five waypoints within 60 minutes Performance Steps 1 Enter or verify correct setup displays a Select setup mode b Select setup units c Select setup magnetic variation type d Select elevation hold mode time reference and error display format e Select setup datum and automatic OFF timer f Select setup data port g Select setup automark 2 Enter crypto
283. rmal and informal assessment and feedback of performance to prepare leaders and Soldiers for their next level of responsibility Assessment is the method used to determine the proficiency and potential of leaders against a known standard Feedback must be clear formative guidance directly related to the outcome of training events measured against standards c Leader Training and Leader Development 1 Competent and confident leaders are a prerequisite to the successful training of units It is important to understand that leader training and leader development are integral parts of unit readiness Leaders are inherently Soldiers first and should be technically and tactically proficient in basic Soldier skills They are also adaptive capable of sensing their environment adjusting the plan when appropriate and properly applying the proficiency acquired through training 2 Leader training is an expansion of these skills that qualifies them to lead other Soldiers As such doctrine and principles of training require the same level of attention of senior commanders Leader training occurs in the Institutional Army the unit the CTCs and through self development Leader training is just one portion of leader development 3 Leader development is the deliberate continuous sequential and progressive process grounded in Army values that grows Soldiers and civilians into competent and confident leaders capable of decisive action Leader developm
284. ropriate network documentation Identified fault Isolated fault Repaired fault Maintained an engineering installation drawing Maintained LAN WAN system 3 108 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related AR 380 5 Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 109 STP 11 25L13 SM TG DETERMINE CABLE DEPTH USING THE 2273 ADVANCED CABLE AND FAULT LOCATOR 113 588 0020 Conditions Given a pre installed buried cable section a 2273 advanced cable and fault locator orange communication cable flags batteries manufactures manual Note 1 This task is performed during daylight hours It should not be performed under adverse weather conditions Note 2 Never connect ground to water pipe of services in the area The return signal may mislead the trace Standards Identified and annotated the location marking and depth of an existing buried cable Performance Steps 1 O a A W N Test batteries a Test batteries in transmitter b Test batteries in receiver Isolate cable shield Install ground rod Place transmitter in proper location Attach transmitter clips to the ground rod black clip and to the cable shi
285. round Descend pole Treat victim for shock Refer to FM 4 25 11 oO ON OD ON Evaluation Preparation Setup Have the Soldier ensure sufficient rope is available to complete this task Brief Soldier Tell the Soldier that he must wear rubber gloves throughout the rescue operation When handling energized wires the Soldier should use only one hand if possible If the voltage exceeds 15 000 volts the Soldier must NOT attempt the rescue until the circuit is definitely broken Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Planned rescue Climbed pole Installed drive hook or screwdriver above victim AA WwW N Wrapped the rope twice around the drive hook or screwdriver and secured loose end of the rope to both D rings of victim s belt Performed artificial respiration on victim while on top of pole if needed Cut the victim s strap simulate Lowered victim to the ground Descended pole OoOo ON O A Treated victim for shock 12 August 2008 3 51 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related FM 4 25 11 3 52 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAKE A COAXIAL CABLE
286. rs train as they are going to fight Battle focus is critical throughout the entire training process and is used by commanders to allocate resources for training based on wartime and operational mission requirements Battle focus enables commanders and staffs at all echelons to structure a training program that copes with non mission related requirements while focusing on mission essential training activities It is recognized that a unit cannot attain proficiency to standard on every task whether due to time or other resource constraints However unit commanders can achieve a successful training program by consciously focusing on a reduced number of METL tasks that are essential to mission accomplishment a Linkage between METL and STP A critical aspect of the battle focus concept is to understand the responsibility for and the linkage between the collective mission essential tasks and the individual tasks that support them For example the commander and the CSM 1SG must jointly coordinate the collective mission essential tasks and supporting individual tasks on which the unit will concentrate its efforts during a given period This task hierarchy is provided in the task database at the Reimer Digital Library The CSM 1SG must select the specific individual tasks that support each collective task to be trained Although NCOs have the primary role in training and sustaining individual Soldier skills officers at every echelon remain responsible for traini
287. rt the anchor and tap it lightly with a hammer until the anchor is flush with the surface 3 Remove the nut from the bolt and insert the anchor in the hole until the bolt head bottoms It may be necessary to lightly tap with a hammer Single element expansion anchor 1 To install the single element expansion anchor drill the correct depth and diameter hole for the anchor 2 Clean out the hole with a blow out bulb then insert the anchor and tap it lightly with a hammer until the anchor is flush with the surface 3 Remove the nut from the bolt and insert the anchor in the hole until the bolt head bottoms It may be necessary to lightly tap with a hammer Hammer driven anchors 1 Locate and drill the hole to the correct diameter and depth Single element anchors require the anchor fit snugly in the hole 2 Blow the hole out and insert the shield through the mounting hole in the fixture and into the hole just drilled Tap lightly until the flange rests against the fixture 3 Insert the nail into the expansion shield and drive the nail until it is firmly seated Do not hammer the nail after it has been seated this will loosen the anchor and reduce the holding power Wood screw anchors 1 Installation of the wood screw anchor requires a pre drilled hole corresponding to the diameter of the anchor before expansion and the depth equal to the length of the expansion shield plus the tip of the screw 2 Insert the shiel
288. ryptographic Items 10 January 1991 Technical Bulletins TB 380 41 O Security Procedures for Safeguarding Accounting and Supply Control of COMSEC Material 15 March 2006 Technical Manuals TM 11 5805 384 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Telephone Set TA 341B TT NSN 5805 01 039 3499 14 December 1982 TM 11 5805 650 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Telephone Set TA 838 TT NSN 5805 00 124 8678 EIC HJH and TA 838A TT 5805 01 125 5976 EIC HOR 25 January 1985 TM 11 5805 701 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Restorer Pulse Form TD 1218 G NSN 5820 01 145 4938 5 March 1985 TM 11 5805 702 12 Operator s and Organizational Maintenance Manual for Restorer Pulse Form TD 1219 G NSN 5820 01 145 4939 5 March 1985 References 4 12 August 2008 TM 11 5805 703 14 TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P TM 11 5995 208 10 TM 9 2320 209 10 1 TM 9 2320 289 20P Training Circulars TC 24 20 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Operator s Organization Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Test Set Telephone TS 3647 G NSN 6625 01 145 2463 16 September 1985 O Operator s Unit and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for General Purpose Tape Reader KOI 18 NSN 7025 01 026 9620 Electronic Transfer Device KYK 13 NSN 5810 01 026 9618 Net Control Device KYX 15 15A NSN 5895 01 026 9619 NSN 5810 01 095 1312 31 May 1989 Operator s Manual
289. s ripple from the DC voltage 4 Check the DC power distribution system to ensure it consists of conductors buss bars circuit breakers filters control panels and fuse panels 5 Check the converter if required for conversion to 48 Volts direct current VDC into other DC voltages 16 Inspect the DC power wiring color code for correctness a Single voltage arrangement 1 Check that black HOT 2 Check that white RETURN 3 Check that yellow REFERENCE b Dual voltage arrangement 1 Check that red PLUS 2 Check that black HOT 3 Check that white COMMON RETURN 4 Check that yellow REFERENCE 17 Inspect the battery racks for correct installation IAW the EIP and that the protective coating was not removed from the racks 18 Inspect battery storage areas for proper safety measures 19 Inspect the basic design of DC power system for full capability a Check that each rectifier charger is capable of assuming full load b Check for minimum voltage level to insure function of the DC powered equipment c Check for uninterruptible power supply UPS to provide power to equipment and subsystems in the event of a loss of primary power 20 Inspect the work site for basic safety precautions a Check that supervisor does not participate in battery installation and constantly supervises b Check that a minimum of three personnel are present for any battery work c Check for evidence of safety briefings conducted d
290. s are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related FM 11 372 1 3 54 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TROUBLESHOOT FIBER OPTIC TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOTS CABLE SYSTEM 113 632 5001 Conditions Given the FOTS terminal two each FOCA CX 13295 G test set TS 4117 G with battery assistants TM 11 6625 3227 13 amp P TM 11 6020 200 10 TM 11 6020 200 23 amp P DA Form 2404 DA Form 2407 and DA Pam 750 8 Standards Identified and repaired faults and established communications Performance Steps 1 Test the FOTS for proper operation 2 Verify all switch and control settings and equipment controls 3 Troubleshoot the FOCA using the TS 4117 G from either end Refer to TM 11 6625 3227 13 amp P and TM 11 6020 200 10 4 If outside of limits have shelter operator check the fiber optic modem FOM if within limits proceed to the next connector until fault is found 5 Replace the FOCA as needed 6 Reestablish communications 7 Maintain the FOCA CX 13295 G a Visually inspect cable for burned broken loose or missing connectors splices and physical damage to cable Refer to TM 11 6020 200 238P b Perform FOCA attenuation testing procedures using the TS 4336 G c Determine malfunction of the FOCA d Perform FOCA fault lo
291. s correctly 5 Performed shut down procedures Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly 12 August 2008 3 177 STP 11 25L13 SM TG References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 3 178 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 19 MOBILE SUBSCRIBER EQUIPMENT LEAD RESTORATION OF TRANSMISSION LINK WITHIN A NETWORK 113 611 6006 Conditions Given an established link with an unknown fault between the originating equipment and terminating terminal Standards Identified link outage through fault isolation and restored or reported and unrepairable fault to the transmission supervisor Performance Steps 1 Identify the fault a Interpret cable route maps and engineering installation package EIP b Check subscriber faults to ensure failure is due to non link fault c Inspect fault isolation results for correctness 2 Direct troubleshooting of cable wire network link 3 Direct repair of cable wire fault 4 Confirm test to verify repair 5 Verify system link status 6 Report system link status to SCC or transmission chief Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Identified the fault Directed troubleshooting of cable wire network link Directed repair of cabl
292. s required Check tower ground for corrosion and loose hardware 9naqQq 0 8 Note Reconnect radio equipment f Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 3 Maintain antenna a Check antenna boom and elements for corrosion b Inspect antenna boom and elements for loose hardware Note It may be necessary to lower the antenna to tighten hardware or clean corrosion c Check insulators 1 Element mounts for cracks 2 Fiberglass tubes for cracks breaks 12 August 2008 4 19 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps d Check lubrication of rotator gearbox Note Oil should be replaced after 240 hours of operation e Lubricate grease fitting on gearbox Note The bearing should be lubricated every 3 months f Check setscrews on motor flywheel for tightness g Check slack on rotator chain CAUTION Tightening the rotator mount bolts may cause tension on the chain Note Reconnect the radio equipment h Perform VSWR test i Complete and submit DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 4 Inspect ground obstruction marker WARNING Do NOT damage the load contact relay when the relay contacts are cleaned Inspect obstruction lamps Check all interconnecting cables and connectors for cracks and breaks Check control assembly Clean obstruction components Check electron tube Adjust timer beacon as required Lubricate shaft bearing and cam Complete and submit DA For
293. scheme Identify tower location Conduct inventory of equipment Install tower base per engineer scheme Assemble tower per engineer scheme Erect tower per engineer scheme oao 3 Install ground obstruction marker CAUTION Electrical equipment must be handled carefully when moving or installing Note Suggested method davit MX 1215 U a Install block and tackle to support b Hoist davit MX 1215 U using block and tackle c Attach davit MX 1215 U to tower d Attach lamp socket and cable assembly to each obstruction light assembly 4 10 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps CAUTION Whenever the three conductor cable passes through a free through connector the rubber plug in the connector must have an oversized hole In all unused feed through connectors the rubber must be replaced with a blank plug e Install obstruction light assembly on tower Note Use a tag line to hold the obstruction and cable assembly out from the tower at a safe distance to keep from damaging obstruction lights and cable assembly f Assemble attach beacon platform and cable assembly together g Hoist beacon platform and cable assembly to top of tower h Install beacon platform and cable assembly to tower i Install automatic control equipment on tower j Perform pre operational checks k Perform adjustment on control WARNING The circuit breaker lever must be placed in the OFF po
294. se preparation of site and equipment a Check LAN client requirements b Check LAN transmission type c Ensure all equipment is on hand d Ensure personnel follow manufacturer s reference manual s e Oversee installation of the NIC f Verify that installation of data communications system will not violate personal computer PC maintenance contracts 2 Ensure personnel connect specified cables to the NIC 3 Ensure personnel connect the data communications systems starting with one PC connecting to the router 4 Repeat step 3 for other PC s 5 Oversee start of hyper terminal session 6 Ensure personnel configure the hyper terminal software according to communications software reference manuals 7 Ensure personnel configure router and its interfaces Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Supervised preparation of site and equipment 2 Ensured personnel connect specified cables to the NIC 3 Ensured personnel connect the data communications systems starting with one PC connecting to the router 4 Repeated step 3 for other PC s 5 Oversaw start of hyper terminal session 6 Ensured personnel configure the hyper terminal software according to communications software reference manuals 7 Ensured personnel configure router and its interfaces 12 August 2008 3 137 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs a
295. section replacement on a 25 pair plastic sheath plastic insulated cable 3 Repaired plastic sheathed aerial buried and underground cable with major damage if required Closed cable n 4 5 Repaired cable terminals in plastic sheathed cable 6 Repaired cable pedestals 7 Located and repair pressurization leaks Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturers Manual 3 50 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM POLE RESCUE OPERATION 113 588 8001 Conditions Given a simulated victim on pole tool equipment TE 21 one drive hook or large flat tip screwdriver one knife TL 29 safety equipment first aid kit one rope of sufficient length and FM 4 25 11 Standards Safely rescued the simulated victim from the pole and gave first aid Performance Steps 1 Plan rescue Climb pole Install drive hook or screwdriver above victim A OO N Wrap the rope twice around the drive hook or screwdriver and secure loose end of the rope to both D rings of victim s belt Perform artificial respiration on victim while on top of pole if needed Cut the victim s strap simulate Lower victim to the g
296. sition before adjusting the position of the permanent magnet breaker Note Itis recommended that this adjustment be made in the early evening when the daylight intensity is approximately that at which the lights should come on each day Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Installed safety equipment using tower method 2 Installed tower Refer to FM 11 487 27 and engineer scheme 3 Installed ground obstruction marker Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Antenna Safety Manual FM 11 487 27 12 August 2008 4 11 STP 11 25L13 SM TG REMOVE SELF SUPPORT TOWER 113 596 1081 Conditions Given self support tower installed tools and equipment safety equipment block and tackle and FM 11 487 27 Note This task is performed at a fixed installation during daylight hours It should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions Assistance is provided as required Standards Disassembled the self support tower including removing all installed equipment tower braces and structure pieces Performance Steps Refer to FM 11 487 27 for all performance steps 1 Remove all installed equipment 2 Remove tower braces 3 Lower braces to ground 4 Stor
297. special PL special adjustable wrench initiated DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 and TM 11 3895 202 13 Standards Performed ULM completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 and the reel unit was operational or evacuated the defective equipment to a higher maintenance level Performance Steps 1 Initiate DA Form 2404 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 2 Perform routine checks Cleaning Preservation Dusting Washing Stowing unused items Checking for loose nuts and bolts PDQA2o00M Check mission essential equipment for completeness 3 4 Check lubrication 5 Check brake unit 6 Complete DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Initiated DA Form 2404 Performed routine checks Checked mission essential equipment for completeness Checked lubrication Checked brake unit Completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 O oa A W N Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 3895 202 13 3 48 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG REPAIR PLASTIC SHEATHED CABLE 113 588 4022 Conditions
298. ssembly 6 7 8 Secure back plate assembly a Mount the back plate assembly to the stake b Install 6 ground wire on the right side of back plate assembly Install grounding connector a Clean an area 1 1 2 times the size of connector on grounding rod b Install 6 ground wire on the right side of back plate assembly Ground CAD 6 terminal Performance Measures 1 O 3 46 Determined CAD 6 terminal location using engineer specifications Prepared location dug section of earth in an 8 x 8 square and 16 inches deep Removed covers of the CAD 6 terminal 2 3 4 5 Installed mounting stake Installed grounding rod placed ground rod on the right side of the back plate assembly Secured back plate assembly Installed grounding connector Grounded CAD 6 terminal 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturer s Manuals 12 August 2008 3 47 STP 11 25L13 SM TG PERFORM UNIT LEVEL MAINTENANCE ULM ON REEL UNIT RL 31 113 588 3005 Conditions Given reel unit RL 31 lint free cloth and brush flat tip screwdriver grease automotive and artillery GAA oil lubricating preservative
299. ssembly to antenna reflector Attached guy wires to feed horn assembly and antenna radome assembly Adjusted guy wire cable tension Assembled and attached frame mount to back of antenna reflector Attached elevation adjusting rod assembly and secured azimuth adjusting rod Installed radome on reflector Raised antenna to desired mounting position Attached and secured antenna to support elements O Oo N O o A W N Attached azimuth mounting brackets to support elements 4 4 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related Manufacturers Manuals 12 August 2008 4 5 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL AB 216 U TOWER 113 596 1027 Conditions Given an engineering scheme tools and equipment tower erection davit MX 1215 U capstan E 12U safety equipment antenna safety manual and construction vehicle 1 4 ton or above M 876 Note This task is performed during daylight hours it should NOT be performed under adverse weather conditions You will work under the supervision of a team crew chief Assistance is provided as required Standards Installed the AB 216
300. ssued with initial issue of equipment Grounding Bonding and Shielding for Electronic Equipments and Facilities 29 December 1987 Grounding Bonding and Shielding for Common Long Haul Communications Systems including Ground Based Communications Electronics Facilities and Equipment 1 February 1992 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 10 January 2008 ISBN 10 087765939 ISBN 13 978 0877657934 http www nfpa orq System Planner Document Unit Operation Order OPORD Air Force Communications Command E I Standard Standard Installation Practices Outside Plant Installation 1 July 2007 Warranty Program for Digital Non Secure Voice Terminal with Digital Data Port TA 1042A U NSN 5805 01 318 8421 1 July 2008 Safety Requirements for Maintenance of Electrical and Electronic Equipment 1 August 1992 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual for Reel Units RL 31 RL 31 B RL 31 C RL 31 D and RL 31 E NSN 3845 00 252 6896 15 January 1986 Operator s Organizational and Direct Support General Support and Depot Maintenance Manual for Reel Equipment CE 11 NSN 5805 00 407 7722 11 April 1967 Operator s Organizational Direct Support and General Support Maintenance Manual for Reeling Machines Cable Engine Driven RL 207 G and RL 207A G NSN 3895 00 892 4583 15 June 1986 Operator s and Unit Maintenance Manual for Telephone Sets TA 312 PT NSN 5805 00 543 0012 and TA 312A PT NSN 5805 01 217 7310
301. t of resistance One ohm is the value of resistance through which a potential difference of one volt will maintain a current of one ampere skill level SL A number which denotes the level of qualification within the total MOS Levels of qualification are identified by characters 0 through 5 in the position of the MOS code Sustainment training The provision of instruction and opportunities for practice to insure that individual or collective task proficiency is maintained at a requisite level The frequency will vary with individual and collective tasks the role location and personnel fill of the unit and the desires of the commander task summary TS A statement of the task in an action verb format plus all essential performance measures A standard format fully describes the task for the Soldier in the field It will accommodate any product or process task whether it is in fixed sequence alternate sequence or combination The task summary is used both to train the Soldier to perform the task and to evaluate the Soldier s ability to perform the task within testing constraints Technical manual TM A publication which describes equipment weapons or weapons systems with instructions for effective use It may include sections for instructions covering initial preparation for use and operational maintenance and overhaul Training Circular TC TCs are publications paper or computer based which provide a means to distribute unit o
302. t set TS 4335 G 3 Checked attenuation level for acceptable levels Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Pam 750 8 3 172 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT SPLICING OF COMMERCIAL FIBER OPTIC CABLE 113 632 9011 Conditions Given a wire cable team with a section of fiber optic cable with faults splicer s hand tools cleaving tools polishing adapter reagent alcohol microscope mechanical splice work station equipment Norland optical adhesive Fiberlok 2501 assembly tool fiber optic fusion splicer test set safety glasses and manufacture instructional manuals Standards Inspected the splicing of fiber optic cable for proper operation after splicing as indicated by manufacture instructional manuals and verified restored communications Performance Steps 1 Inspect splicing technique used a Norland ultraviolet curing UVC optical splice b AMP optimate mechanical fiber optic splice c Fusion splicer d Fiberlok optical splice 2 Inspect set up of work station and equipment according to splicing technique 3 Test operation of fiber cable for correct tolerance and operation 4 Check for reestablishment of communications Performance Measur
303. tall pressure bypass install pressure plug install pressure test point install contactor terminal install transducer terminal and install continuous feed pressure system a Install pressure bypass Given OD copper plastic or lead tubing 1 4 inch wrench bypass valve soldering equipment lashed cable supports plastic tie down straps pressure test flanges mounting brackets plugs wood pipes pipe straps valve housing drive anchor 1 1 4 inches x 1 4 inch size C gauge and soap solution b Install pressure plugs Given polyurethane compound Rosalyn 164 compound or equivalent C compound 4 ounce can channeling pins tie down plastic straps 7 inches long plastic vinyl tape 3 4 inch wide plastic vinyl tape 1 1 2 inches wide hose clamp injection fitting USF 1A tabbing shears splicer s scissors knife cable core depressor chipping and sheathing knife orange sticks cable drill carding brush 3M 4401 compound injection gun screwdriver paper tape 1 2 inch wide DR tape B sealing tape Allen wrench 3 16 inch and small hammer c Install pressure test point Given stainless steel sealing clamps hose clamps vinyl tape appropriate pressure tubing appropriate pressure fittings knife wrench tubing cutter emery cloth pipe joint compound carding brush cable drill orange sticks corrosion resistant steel strip metal shears file screwdriver core depressor tool muslin strips split poly washer of correct diam
304. tay on Turn the mode switch on KYK 13 to off and remove from KG RESYNC Green LED lights to show that synchronization between the local and remote units has occurred s Q aaow Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Turned power on 2 Performed lamp test 3 Loaded COMSEC Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 5810 365 10 UNIT OPORD 12 August 2008 3 115 STP 11 25L13 SM TG MAINTAIN TRUNK ENCRYPTION DEVICE 113 609 3001 Conditions Given a KG 94A or KG 194A and image understanding architecture IUA connection cables power source and other associated equipment that has been previously installed Standards Maintained trunk encryption device TED in accordance with preventive maintenance checks and services PMCS procedures Performance Steps 1 Check fill battery 2 Check lamps 3 Check equipment surface 4 Check controls switches Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Checked fill battery 2 Checked lamps a 3 Checked equipment surface 4 Checked controls switches Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any P
305. te or filling cells mix a solution of baking soda and water Mix one gallon of water per box of baking soda to use to neutralize electrolyte acid spills 2 When preparing electrolyte for flooded cell type batteries always POUR ACID INTO WATER SLOWLY PAWS NEVER water into acid CAUTION If this procedure is not followed an extremely violent chemical reaction will take place and could seriously injure anyone nearby 3 Acid mixed with water produces hydrogen gas which is highly explosive This means no sparks near the area and adequate of ventilation must be provided 4 Electrolyte is available in premixed solutions which is safer 9 Identify placement and numbering of cells a When installing flooded cells the lowest numbered cells will be placed in the lower racks 1 Tiered racks are filled from the lowest level first working from the center to the outside 2 Stepped racks are filled by installing a cell on each step starting with the lowest step then working toward the highest step b Once the cells are placed in the racks cell alignment must be done 1 Stretch a piece of twine between the first cell terminal and the last cell terminal of each row Ensure the twine is on the same side of all terminals and then align the batteries 2 Without tightening the straps space each cell the length of the strap starting at the center and work towards the ends of each row c Absolyte batteries may be arranged vertically
306. the Army Trains the Army 1 Training is a team effort and the entire Army Department of the Army DA major Army commands MACOMs the institutional training base units the combat training centers CTCs each individual Soldier and the civilian workforce has a role that contributes to force readiness DA and MACOMS are responsible for resourcing the Army to train The Institutional Army including schools training centers and NCO academies for example train Soldiers and leaders to take their place in units in the Army by teaching the doctrine and tactics techniques and procedures TTP Units leaders and individuals train to standard on their assigned critical individual tasks The unit trains first as an organic unit and then as an integrated component of a team Before the unit can be trained to function as a team each Soldier must be trained to perform their individual supporting tasks to standard Operational deployments and major training opportunities such as major training exercises CTCs and ARTEPs provide rigorous realistic and stressful training and operational experience under actual or simulated combat and operational conditions to enhance unit readiness and produce bold innovative leaders The result of this Army wide team effort is a training and leader development system that is unrivaled in the world Effective training produces the force Soldiers leaders and units that can successfully execute any assigned missio
307. the ceiling 3 Securing a threaded rod to a wooden ceiling joist with loads of more than 300 pounds requires drilling a hole through the joist A load of less than 300 pounds can be secured with a threaded rod attached to a bracket and two 3 8 inch by 2 inch long minimum lag screws 4 Direct overhead support is established when the support rods can be anchored directly into the ceiling 5 Other attachments used with threaded rods are I beam clamps U shaped brackets and drive pins Check to make sure the maximum load is not exceeded WARNING beam to attach anchoring devices it Never drill holes through an could weaken the structure 6 For greater strength a 5 8 inch threaded rod is recommended for all cable rack installations 7 Special hangers for a single threaded rod may be used to support cable racks up to 15 inches in width Racks wider than 15 inches require two threaded rods 8 Cable racks may be supported directly from the ceiling using threaded rods by one of two methods Two threaded rods are required if the width of the cable rack is 20 inches or more Support of 12 and 15 inch cable racks may be provided by a short length of lipped channel fastened flush against the ceiling by one securing device in the center of the channel and a pair of threaded rods attached 9 Unless unavoidable threaded rods should not be bent to provide an offset If no other means is practicable bends are permissible however
308. the switch to the common brass terminal A on the duplex receptacle b If only one receptacle is to be switched ensure the tab B is broken then connect the second hot wire from the source to the second brass terminal C on the receptacle to provide unswitched power c If both receptacles are to be switched ensure the tab B is unbroken intact to provide the second receptacle switched power A second hot wire is not needed in this case 3 The silver terminal screw D on the receptacle must be connected to the neutral conductor white or gray which originates at a neutral buss bar or a splice from a previous circuit and goes directly to the receptacle 4 The silver tab E must stay intact unbroken regardless of being switched or unswitched to provide neutral for the second silver terminal F on the second receptacle 12 August 2008 3 13 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 5 The green ground terminal G on the receptacle is required to be connected with the green insulated conductor This conductor originates at the ground buss or a splice from a previous outlet 6 Each conductor that requires a splice will use the in the middle splice and the ground will use the stand alone splice Refer to grounding rules k Wire a 120 240 V AC duplex receptacle Both receptacles unswitched 1 The source L 1 that originates from the circuit breaker or a previous outlet splice is connected to the brass terminal
309. tional marks on the wall to provide reference for vertical alignment d Align a level on the mark made vertically denoting the lower edge of the equipment and draw a reference line to be used for locating purposes e The procedures outlined above may also be used for vertical and horizontal alignment of conduit For long runs it is more accurate and practical to snap a chalk line 9 Determine the level of the floor Equipment racks must be installed as level as possible For this reason floors must be checked for level before equipment is installed a Twine and Block Method 1 Obtain a length of twine not longer than ten feet long 3 102 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 2 Attached each end of the twine to blocks of wood of even height and place them on line with the proposed equipment lineup 3 Stretch the twine taut and use a third block of wood or a ruler to determine the high spots 4 For more than one high spot use a ruler to determine the highest point b Chalk Line Method 1 Use a heavily chalked chalk line no longer than 10 feet 2 Hold the line tight against the floor at one end of the proposed lineup 3 Drag one end of the line back and forth across the floor This will leave chalk on the high spots and the low spots will be clear c The Level and Straightedge Method 1 A straight 2 X 4 can be used or a straight length of metal laid on the section of the floor where the equipment is to
310. to be tested to the U 185B G connector on adapter cable W100 c Turn on the test set d Set CABLE LENGTH switch to the length of the cable under test If testing multiple connected cables set the switch to the combined length e Set the AUTO SINGLE switch to AUTO f Set the FUNCTION switch to CONT P Note The AN GTM 12 sequentially tests each wire pair for open circuits If the test proceeds through pair 26 and the END light illuminates for approximately 20 seconds then the cable under test has no open conductors If the AN GTM 12 detects a conductor break open circuit the test will stop the fault light will illuminate and the broken wire pair will be identified in the display g Press and release the ADVANCE switch h Observe the flashing TEST light and the advancing circuit numbers in the display window if the test set is powered in the AC or DC mode as the test sequences through each wire pair Note If a fault is detected record the number of the defective wire pair If the END light illuminates for approximately 20 seconds skip to step j i Repeat steps g and h until the END light illuminates j Disconnect the Shorting Block P 3 34 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 4 Perform IR test Connect adapter cable W100 to connector J100 Connect the cable to be tested to the U 185B G connector on adapter cable W100 Turn on the test set Set the AUTO SINGLE switch to AUTO Set the F
311. tom to the top The mounted blocks cannot be out of alignment more than 1 8 inch per foot nor more than 1 4 inch over the entire row b The vertical terminal blocks of an IDF are lettered alphabetically from bottom to top and the verticals are numbered from the permanent end starting with 01 Identification of a vertical block will be listed with the number first and the letter second e g 03D 5 The horizontal side of an IDF terminates cable from the equipment and patch panels a The horizontal terminal blocks are mounted on the terminal mounting bars Terminal block assignment drawings show the size and placement of the terminal blocks to be mounted The terminal blocks cannot be out of alignment more than 1 8 inch per foot nor more than 1 4 inch over the entire length b To count horizontal shelves and terminal blocks on an IDF use the same method as on the horizontal side of the MDF c CDF 1 The purpose of a CDF is to combine the functions of an MDF and an IDF 2 The location of the MDF portion of a CDF is usually directly over the cable vault and ata right angle to the equipment 3 The MDF portion of a CDF mounts protector blocks on the vertical side and terminal blocks on the horizontal side The IDF portion mounts terminal blocks on the vertical and horizontal sides a The count on the vertical side of a CDF starts at the point where both frames join the MDF portion is counted starting with 1 to the growing end a
312. trunk encryption device trainer s guide Tactical Internet Telecommunications Industry Association Glossary 3 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TIM TG Timing Generator Auto Strapping Card TIM BT Built In Test Equipment Card TM technical manual TNG Tng training TRL total rough link TSEC telecommunications security TSO telecommunications service order TTP Tactics Techniques and Procedures ULM unit level maintenance UNIT trained in the unit brevity code UPS uninterruptible power supply US United States USAR United States Army Reserve UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair Cat 5 network cabling UVC ultra violet curing V volt s V AC volts alternating current V DC volts direct current VolP Voice over Internet Protocol VSWR variable standing wave ratio WwW watt s WAN Wide Area Network WK Weekly frequency code WWW World Wide Web X TALK cross talk SECTION Il TERMS Additional skill identifier ASI or officer skill identifier SI Identification of specialized skills that are closely related to and are in addition to those required by military occupational specialty or areas of concentration officers Specialized skills identified by the ASI or officer SI include operation and maintenance of specific weapons systems and equipment administrative systems and subsystems computer programming procedures installation management analytic methods animal handling techniques and other required skills that are too restricted in sc
313. ttery Check optical strength meter OSM display 12 Complete DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Refer to DA Pam 750 8 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 N DO OO FB W ND 3 28 Initiated DA Form 2404 Performed routine checks Checked for loose nuts bolts and screws Checked transit case Checked handset Checked reference cable assembly Checked fiber optic loopback connector Checked switch actuator assembly 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures GO NO GO 8 Checked case top O ring 9 Checked front panel gt 10 Checked battery 11 Checked OSM display 12 Completed DA Form 2404 and DA Form 2408 14 Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 11 6625 3227 13 amp P 12 August 2008 3 29 STP 11 25L13 SM TG TROUBLESHOOT TELEPHONE CABLE WD 1 TT OR WF 16 U 113 588 0005 Conditions Given a telephone cable installed with fault telephone set TA 312 PT operational three each with six BA 30s tool equipment TE 33 electrical friction tape lineman s gloves two assistants TC 24 20 a
314. ttings or slip fittings provide a means to adjust the length of straight connections from inch to 11 inches 3 End fittings connect duct to panels and cabinets Cutting a hole and drilling mounting holes to match the end fitting can result in a solid connection free of rough edges 4 Elbows are available in 22 72 45 and 90 degree bends and attach with a connector or coupling 5 Tee fittings are available to branch standard sections of duct 6 Junction boxes have four openings that can be coupled with connectors Unused openings are sealed with closing plates 7 Pull boxes large junction box has six openings two sides with one opening each and two sides with two openings each Pull boxes are used when several ducts are spliced together at a junction 8 Reducer fittings are available to connect different sizes of duct together The standard reducer sizes are 4 X 4 duct to 2 1 2 x 2 1 2 6 X 6 to 4 X 4 8 X 8 to 6 X 6 and 12 X 12 to 8 X 8 duct 9 Transposition sections permit the wireway to be rotated 90 degrees and continue the lay in feature 10 Partitions or barriers can be installed inside the duct to separate power and communication cables d Wireway and duct whether used for signal or power conductors must be made electrically continuous by bonding together all sections Wireway must have a grounding strap installed at each junction and splice Connect all sections and lids using straps fabri
315. uipMent ceccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceueaeeeeeeeeeteees 4 43 PAPRENDIXGA E AT cast eies tea cies cavceatseceesticg E evaauath soci ster T A 1 APPENDIX Biscia anann areta ena ornano aA AE cvacteussctheVaessecteesainydeh ote gtuteesnietvactedthesueieroeeieewte B 1 GIOSSAFY ees awiccescscdaceedcacccesesceanssccceccensscdassecseeccassscdecseceeddcesssccuseccsesccessscesecscecess Glossary 1 References eeesseseceeceoecoccececocoococcccccccoccoceccecococcoccccecocoecocsececocoecoceccecocoesocssececocoesoe References 1 12 August 2008 v Preface This publication is for skill levels 1 2 and 3 Soldiers holding military occupational specialty MOS 25L and for trainers and first line supervisors It contains standardized training objectives in the form of task summaries to train and evaluate Soldiers on critical tasks that support unit missions during wartime Trainers and first line supervisors should ensure Soldiers holding MOS 25L skill levels 1 2 and 3 have access to this publication It should be made available in the Soldier s work area unit learning center and unit libraries This publication applies to the Active Army the Army National Guard ARNG Army National Guard of the United States ARNGUS and the United States Army Reserve USAR The proponent for this publication is the Signal School Send comments and recommendations on Department of the Army DA Form 2028 Recommended Changes to Publications and Bla
316. uit into the coupling and tighten the setscrews 3 Transition assemblies are special couplings used to connect flex to rigid or EMT conduit One side is threaded rigid only or an EMT compression type coupling for EMT and the other side is a flex fitting 10 Install box connectors a Threaded box connectors use locknuts on each side with a bushing over the end of the conduit providing protection for conductors 1 To install a box connector in a conduit body place the small threaded end of the connector into the hole on the conduit body and tighten 2 To install a box connector in a utility box put the small threaded end of the connector body into one of the knockout holes in the box and secure with a locknut b To install EMT conduit on a box connector place the gland nut and compression ring over the end of the conduit slide the conduit into the connector and tighten the gland nut and ring onto the connector body c To install threadless box connectors place a gland nut and compression ring over the end of the conduit and tighten d Install flexible conduit connectors 1 There are two types of connectors used on flexible conduit one is internal and the other is external 2 To install the internal box connector on flex conduit requires screwing it into the spiral part of the flex conduit This connector covers the cut end of the flexible conduit to protect the conductors from sharp edges 3 The external box connect
317. unctions that were identified 4 Inspect to ensure corrective actions were taken 5 Inspect the reestablishment of communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Inspected the testing procedures used to determine if trouble existed 2 Inspected troubleshooting methods for the wire and cable IAW TMs 3 Inspected the malfunctions that were identified 4 Inspected to ensure corrective actions were taken 5 Inspected the reestablishment of communications Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related TM 11 6020 200 10 TM 11 6625 3227 13 amp P 12 August 2008 3 151 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSPECT OPERATION OF FIBER OPTIC CABLE TEST SET 113 632 9009 Conditions Given a fiber optic test set team of cable installers an EIP section of cable to be inspected DA form 2404 or computer generated DA Form 5988 E Equipment Inspection Maintenance Worksheet EGA and DA Pam 750 8 Note This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation under all weather conditions it may be performed in an CBRN environment Standards Inspected operation of fiber optic test set Performance Steps 1 Inspect ULM on identified fiber optic test set a
318. under the in the task summary d In column b enter the PM corresponding to the PM number in column a You may abbreviate this information if necessary e Enter the Evaluation Guidance statement from the Soldier s manual task summary just below the last PM f Locally reproduce the partially completed form if you are evaluating more than one Soldier on the task or the same Soldier on more than one task A 3 During the Evaluation a Enter the date just before evaluating the Soldier s task performance b Enter the evaluator s name and the Soldier s name and unit c For each PM in column b enter a check in column c PASS or column d FAIL as appropriate d Compare the number of PMs the Soldier passes and if applicable which ones against the task standard shown in the Evaluation Guidance statement If the standard is met or exceeded check the GO block under STATUS otherwise check the NO GO block 12 August 2008 A 1 STP 11 25L13 SM TG HANDS ON EVALUATION For use of this form see STP 11 25S514 SM TG the proponent agency is TRADOC 2 APR 2003 TASK TITLE TASK NUMBER Perform System Shutdown for SEN System AN TTC 48 V 113 625 2090 SCORE Check One PASS FAIL PERFORMANCE STEP TITLE b Performed Operational Shutdown Procedures Performed Storage Procedures Performed Power Cabling Removal Storage Procedures Performed Subscriber Field Cable Removal Storage Procedures
319. ure Avoid installing cables in high temperature areas if this is not possible use Teflon jacketed cable c Length The interconnecting cable is the longest transmission path The following should be considered when installing RF cable 1 Use as short a length as possible to lessen attenuation 2 Use as few sections as possible to keep connections to a minimum and avoid excess attenuation 12 August 2008 3 5 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 3 When connecting to slide mounted equipment allow sufficient slack to permit unrestricted movement of the equipment d Minimum bending radius The minimum RF cable bending radius is 10 times the diameter of the cable e Vibration To reduce vibration damage wrap friction tape around the cable starting at the clamp nearest the equipment and wrapping the cable 3 to 4 inches toward the equipment Abrasion The following should be considered for prevention of abrasion to the cable jacket 1 Use only preformed cable straps 2 Do not dent or damage rigid cable it will alter the electrical characteristics of the cable 3 Protect the cables with rubber grommets sleeves or tape where they may be subject to abrasion g To detect cable faults check it on the reel before installation with a Megger The standard 500 volt Megger is the only equipment needed to test the cable for proper insulation properties h Check the CRL in the EIP for cable designations Do not use cable lengths given in
320. ut cable end Place nut washer and gasket on cable Remove outer jacket Place braid clamp on cable Cut braid and dielectric Cut and tin inner conductor Place contact on cable Position gasket washer and nut Install assembly Performance Measures 1 oN DOO A W N 3 42 Inventoried connector parts Cut cable end Placed nut washer and gasket on cable Removed outer jacket Placed braid clamp on cable Cut braid and dielectric Cut and tin inner conductor Placed contact on cable 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Measures 9 Positioned gasket washer and nut 10 Installed assembly Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Manufacturer s Manuals Related 12 August 2008 3 43 STP 11 25L13 SM TG INSTALL UNDERGROUND CABLE SYSTEM 113 588 1107 Conditions Given manhole rail guard barricades with warning lights warning signs warning flag flag and warning light stand rodding and duct cleaning equipment winch operated chains construction vehicle with winch rope cable reel cable trailer reel jacks cable lubrication cable feeder pulling eye pulling line cable grip duct tape core hitch eye cabl
321. vidual crew and small team proficiency Senior NCOs coach junior NCOs to master a wide range of individual tasks 3 Soldier Responsibility Each Soldier is responsible for performing individual tasks identified by the first line supervisor based on the unit s mission essential task list METL Soldiers must perform tasks to the standards included in the task summary If Soldiers have questions about tasks or which tasks in this manual they must perform they are responsible for asking their first line supervisor for Clarification assistance and guidance First line supervisors know how to perform each task or can direct Soldiers to appropriate training materials including current FMs technical manuals TMs and Army regulations ARs Soldiers are responsible for using these materials to maintain performance They are also responsible for maintaining standard performance levels of all Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks at their current skill level and below Periodically Soldiers should ask their supervisor or another Soldier to check their performance to ensure that they can perform the tasks 1 3 BATTLE FOCUSED TRAINING Battle focus is a concept used to derive peacetime training requirements from assigned and anticipated missions The priority of training in units is to train to standard on the wartime mission Battle focus guides the planning preparation execution and assessment of each organization s training program to ensure its membe
322. volving battery acid 3 18 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps d Pal Batteries can produce hydrogen gas which is highly explosive Care must be taken to prevent build up of static charge Before making contact with a cell discharge static electricity by touching a grounded surface Adequate ventilation must be provided exhaust fan to prevent dangerous levels of hydrogen gas from building up Acid must be mixed with water POUR ACID INTO WATER SLOWLY PAWS and stir NEVER pour water into acid Prior to mixing electrolyte or filling cells with electrolyte mix one box of baking soda to one gallon of water If anyone gets electrolyte in their eyes follow these steps 1 Close both eyes to keep eye movement minimized This will allow the eyes to naturally wash while the victim is being escorted to the eye washstand DO NOT rub eyelids 2 Flush eyes with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention All battery rooms must have a working eyewash and shower installed before batteries can be installed If not provided a large bathtub filled with a baking soda and water solution is acceptable Proper safety gear face shield gloves aprons etc must be worn while working around batteries A3 to 5 gallon container of baking soda solution will be available to neutralize any acid splashed Always follow manufacturer s instruction during a battery installation and inspe
323. where to mark on the conduit for bending a regular 90 degree bend 2 The 90 degree bend a Measure from a reference point to the point where the bend is to be made b Hold the conduit in place keeping it level and against the surface measure from the reference point the same distance along the conduit c Draw an arrow on the conduit approximately 8 inches away from the mark towards the noncommitted end and pointing in the direction the conduit will be bent d Place the conduit in the bender with the bender TOE pointing toward the noncommitted end of the conduit and the arrow that was drawn on the conduit pointing up Align the mark with the star and bend to 90 degrees 3 The telescopic method requires two installers and a straight piece of conduit a Hold the conduit level against the surface and put a piece of straight conduit into the box connector where the bend is to terminate b Make sure both pieces of conduit are plumb and mark on the outside where the two pieces intersect c Draw an arrow on the conduit as a reminder as which way to bend towards the noncommitted end and pointing in the direction of the bend 3 122 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps d Place the conduit in the bender with the bender TOE pointing toward the noncommitted end and the arrow that was drawn on the conduit pointing up Align the mark with the star and bend it 90 degrees e If the conduit must be bent with the be
324. y References Required Related TM 11 5805 706 12 DA Pam 25 380 2 TM 11 5805 707 12 TB 380 41 TM 11 5810 292 13 amp P TM 11 5810 329 10 3 134 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG SUPERVISE TROUBLESHOOTING OF KY 68 113 600 7043 Conditions Given a digital subscriber voice terminal DSVT TSEC KY 68 telephone cable WF 16 U multiplexer TD 1233 P TTC multiplexer combiner TD 1234 P TTC radio repeater set AN TRC 138A radio terminal set AN GRC 173 radio repeater set AN TRC 174 radio terminal set AN TRC 175 battery BA 1372 1 each TM 11 5810 329 10 TM 11 5820 864 12 1 TM 11 5820 865 12 1 TM 11 5820 926 12 1 and TM 11 5820 931 12 1 Note 1 The unkeyed DSVT TSEC KY 68 is classified CONFIDENTIAL It should be handled properly Note 2 The DSVT TSEC KY 68 is loaded with variables for the PMs Standards Performed troubleshooting of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 identified the problem corrected the fault s and reestablished communications in accordance with the PMs Performance Steps 1 Verify that the trouble exists Verify that the KY 68 is getting power Refer to TM 11 5810 329 10 Supervise troubleshooting the DSVT TSEC KY 68 system Refer to TM 11 5810 329 10 Ensure malfunction s are identified Ensure corrective actions are taken Refer to TM 11 5810 329 10 O a A W N Supervise the reestablishment of communications Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Verified that the trouble existed Ver
325. y training is executed using the crawl walk run approach This allows and promotes an objective standards based approach to training Training starts at the basic level Crawl events are relatively simple to conduct and require minimum support from the unit After the crawl stage training becomes incrementally more difficult requiring more resources from the unit and home station and increasing the level of realism At the run stage the level of difficulty for the training event intensifies Run stage training requires optimum resources and ideally approaches the level of realism expected in combat Progression from the walk to the run stage for a particular task may occur during a one day training exercise or may require a succession of training periods over time Achievement of the Army standard determines progression between stages 1 6 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG 1 In crawl walk run training the tasks and the standards remain the same however the conditions under which they are trained change Commanders may change the conditions for example by increasing the difficulty of the conditions under which the task is being performed increasing the tempo of the task training increasing the number of tasks being trained or by increasing the number of personnel involved in the training Whichever approach is used it is important that all leaders and Soldiers involved understand in which stage they are currently training and understand t
326. y around the conduit g Bending offsets 1 Mark the conduit a Measure 2 inches from the end of the conduit and mark with a grease pencil all the way around the conduit This is the 2 inch constant used with 1 2 inch EMT only b Measure the offset depth from the surface of the wall to the edge of the box connector If the measurement is a fraction round it off to the nearest whole number aan 12 August 2008 3 121 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Performance Steps 2 Determine the desired degree of bend Bends of 22 1 2 degrees are preferred because pulling wires through shallow bends is easier 3 Align the 2 inch constant mark with the arrow on the bender and bend the conduit the desired number of degrees 4 Turn the conduit 180 degrees and align the second mark with the arrow and bend to the same number of degrees as the first bend 5 Check the offset by sliding the conduit into the box connector When placed against a flat surface the 2 inch constant should be parallel to the surface 6 The offset should not be doglegged This can occur if the conduit was not turned exactly 180 degrees before making the second bend or if the handle of the bender was not pulled straight back when making the bend h Bend a saddle 1 A saddle requires three bends The A bend first bend is aligned with the rim notch on the bender and is bent to 45 degrees The B and C bends are bent on the arrow and are bent to 22 1 2 degrees 2 Measure fro
327. y the operator 4 Inspected DA Form 2404 for operator entries 5 Signed DA Form 2404 if fault actually existed Evaluation Guidance Score the Soldier a GO if all PMs are passed Score the Soldier a NO GO if any PM is failed If the Soldier fails any PM show what was done wrong and how to do it correctly Have the Soldier perform the PMs until they are done correctly References Required Related DA Form 2404 DA Form 2408 14 DA Pam 750 8 TM 9 2320 269 10 3 160 12 August 2008 STP 11 25L13 SM TG Subject Area 14 TELEPHONE SETS INSPECTION INSPECT INSTALLATION OF KY 68 113 600 7045 Conditions Given digital subscriber voice terminal DSVT TSEC KY 68 telephone cable WF 16 U loaded device KYK 13 TSEC and TM 11 5810 329 10 Note 1 This task is performed in a tactical or nontactical situation under all weather conditions it may be performed in an CBRN environment Note 2 The DSVT TSEC KY68 is classified equipment It should be handled properly Standards The DSVT TSEC KY 68 had been secured and the DSVT was operating properly Performance Steps 1 Direct the installation of battery BA 1372 2 Direct the installation and grounding of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 3 Direct the loading of variables into the DSVT using the KYK 13 TSEC 4 Direct the operation of the DSVT TSEC KY 68 Performance Measures GO NO GO 1 Directed the installation of battery BA 1372 2 Directed the installation

STP 11-25L13-SM-TG Soldier`s Manual and Trainer`s

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents